Owner's Manual Web Edition

VOLVO S80

Owner's manual Web Edition

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that could hinder your ability to drive. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards. For further information please contact your retailer, or: In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 www.volvocars.us In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp National Customer Service 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocanada.com 2009 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved. Contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm Important information...... 8 Occupant safety...... 16 Remote key and key blade...... 54 Important warnings...... 12 Reporting safety defects...... 17 Valet locking ...... 61 Environment...... 13 Seat belts ...... 18 Keyless drive...... 62 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... 21 Locks...... 65 Occupant Weight Sensor ...... 26 Alarm...... 68 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 30 Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC) ...... 32 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... 33 Crash mode...... 35 Child safety...... 36 Child restraint systems...... 38 Infant seats...... 40 Convertible seats...... 42 00 Booster01 cushions...... 44 02 ISOFIX lower anchors...... 45 Top tether anchors...... 46 Child restraint registration and recalls...... 47 Integrated booster cushion...... 48 Child safety locks...... 50

4 Contents

03 Your driving environment 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 During your trip Instruments and controls...... 74 Menus and messages...... 124 Driving recommendations...... 198 Ignition modes...... 82 Climate system...... 128 Refueling...... 202 Seats...... 84 Audio system...... 135 Loading...... 206 SeatsಥS80 Executive ...... 89 Bluetooth® hands-free connection...... 149 Towing a trailer...... 209 Steering wheel...... 91 Trip computer...... 155 Emergency towing...... 211 Lighting...... 92 Compass...... 157 Wipers and washers...... 98 Stability system...... 158 Power windows...... 100 Active chassis system–Four C...... 160 Mirrors...... 102 Cruise control...... 161 Power moonroof...... 104 Collision warning with Auto-brake*...... 163 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*... 106 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*...... 169 Starting the engine...... 109 Distance alert* ...... 176 Transmission...... 113 Driver Alert System* ...... 179 Brakes...... 03 116 Park04 assist*...... 184 05 Parking brake...... 118 Blind Spot Information System*...... 187 Passenger compartment convenience... 191 Passenger compartment convenience– S80 Executive ...... 194

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Contents

06 Maintenance and 07 Index specifications Index...... 282 Volvo maintenance...... 216 Maintaining your car...... 217 Hood and engine compartment...... 219 Engine oil...... 220 Fluids...... 222 Replacing bulbs...... 224 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 232 Battery...... 234 Fuses...... 237 Wheels and tires...... 246 Vehicle care...... 267 Label information...... 272 Specifications...... 274 Volvo06 programs...... 281 07

6 Contents

7 Introduction

Important information

About this manual Decals Risk of damage to the vehicle There are various types of decals in the vehicle • Before you operate your vehicle for the first whose purpose is to provide important infor- time, please familiarize yourself with the mation in a clear and concise way. The impor- information found in the chapters "Your tance of these decals is explained as follows, Driving Environment" and "During Your in descending order of importance. Trip." • Information contained in the balance of the Risk of injury manual is extremely useful and should preferably be read after operating the vehicle for the first time. • The manual is structured so that it can be used for reference. For this reason, it should be kept in the vehicle for ready

access. G031592 Footnotes Certain pages of this manual contain informa- White ISO symbols and white text/image on a tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of black or blue warning background and space the page. This information supplements the for a message. If the information on decals of text that the footnote number refers to (a letter this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle is used if the footnote refers to text in a table). could result. G031590 Display texts There are several displays in the driver’s field Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back- of vision that show messages generated by ground, white text/image on a black back- various systems and functions in the vehicle. ground. Decals of this type are used to indicate These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man- potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur- type could result in serious injury or death. rounding text and are printed in gray, (for example: Doors auto lock).

8 Introduction

Important information

Information Types of lists used in the manual Bullet lists Procedures Bullets are used to differentiate a number of Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or components/functions/points of information actions that must be carried out in a certain that can be listed in random order. order, are arranged in numbered lists in this For example: manual. • Coolant If there is a series of illustrations associated • Engine oil with step-by-step instructions, each step in the procedure is numbered in the same Continued way as the corresponding illustration. This symbol can be found at the lower right Lists in which letters are used can be found corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page with series of illustrations in cases where to indicate that the current topic is continued the order in which the instructions are car- on the following page. G031593 ried out is not important. Options and accessories Arrows with or without numbers are used White ISO symbols and white text/image on a Optional or accessory equipment described in to indicate the direction of a movement. black background. These decals provide gen- this manual is indicated by an asterisk. eral information. If there are no illustrations associated with a Optional or accessory equipment may not be step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure available in all countries or markets. Please NOTE are indicated by ordinary numbers. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- Position lists ferently, depending on special legal require- The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are examples only and are not intended to Red circles containing a number are used ments. in general overview illustrations in which be reproductions of the decals actually used Optional or accessory equipment may not be certain components are pointed out. The in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi- available in all countries or markets. Please cation of how they look and their approxi- corresponding number is also used in the note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- mate location in the vehicle. The applicable position list's description of the various ferently, depending on special legal require- information for your particular vehicle can components. be found on the respective decals in the ments. vehicle. Contact your Volvo retailer for additional information.

9 Introduction

Important information

NOTE WARNING Shiftlock When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector • All information, illustrations and specifi- CALIFORNIA proposition 65 is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the cations contained in this manual are Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, selector from this position, the ignition must be based on the latest product information and certain vehicle components contain or in mode II (see page 82) or the engine must available at the time of publication. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- be running. Depress the brake pedal, press the • Volvo reserves the right to make model fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or button on the front side of the gear selector and other reproductive harm. In addition, certain changes at any time, or to change spec- move the selector from P (Park). ifications or design without notice and fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or without incurring obligation. emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- Keylock • Do not export your Volvo to another fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or When you switch off the ignition, the gear country before investigating that coun- other reproductive harm. selector must be in the P (Park) position before try's applicable safety and emission the remote key can be removed from the igni- control requirements. In some cases it tion slot. may be difficult or impossible to comply WARNING with these requirements. Modifications Certain components of this vehicle such as Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) to the emission control system(s) may air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnos- render your Volvo not certifiable for adaptive steering columns, and button cell tic test when the engine has been started and legal operation in the U.S., Canada and batteries may contain Perchlorate material. driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- other countries. Special handling may apply for service or matic test may be performed when the vehicle vehicle end of life disposal. first reaches a speed of approximately 25 mph See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ (40 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several WARNING perchlorate. times and a sound may be audible from the If your vehicle is involved in an accident, ABS control module. This is normal. unseen damage may affect its drivability and safety. Fuel filler door Press the button on the light switch panel (see the illustration on page 204) when the vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks.

10 Introduction

Important information

Fuel filler cap Vehicle event data (Black box) The fuel filler door, located on the right rear Your vehicle's driving and safety systems fender, is connected to your vehicle's central employ computers that monitor, and share locking system. with each other, information about your vehicle's operation. One or more of these comput- Points to keep in mind ers may store what they monitor, either during • Do not export your Volvo to another coun- normal vehicle operation or in a crash or near- try before investigating that country's crash event. Stored information may be read applicable safety and exhaust emission and used by: requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these • Volvo Car Corporation requirements. Modifications to the emis- • service and repair facilities sion control system(s) may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in • law enforcement or government agencies the U.S., Canada and other countries. • others who may assert a legal right to • All information, illustrations and specifica- know, or who obtain your consent to know tions contained in this manual are based on such information. the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differ- ently, depending on special legal requirements. Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in all markets. • Volvo reserves the right to make model changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation.

11 Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction cellular telephone use by a driver while the • Accessories that have not been approved A driver has a responsibility to do everything vehicle is moving. by Volvo may or may not be specifically possible to ensure his or her own safety and • If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga- tested for compatibility with your vehicle. the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth- tion system, set and make changes to your Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your car's ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. systems. is part of that responsibility. • Never program your audio system while the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre- • Any of your car's performance and safety Driver distraction results from driver activities systems could be adversely affected if you that are not directly related to controlling the sets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use install accessories that Volvo has not tes- vehicle in the driving environment. Your new quicker and simpler. ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal- Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea- led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi- ture-rich entertainment and communication • Never use portable computers or personal cle. systems. These include hands-free cellular tel- digital assistants while the vehicle is moving. • Damage caused by unapproved or ephones, navigation systems, and multipur- improperly installed accessories may not pose audio systems. You may also own other be covered by your new vehicle warranty. portable electronic devices for your own con- Accessory installation See your Warranty and Service Records venience. When used properly and safely, they • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners Information booklet for more warranty enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, install only genuine, Volvo-approved information. Volvo assumes no responsi- any of these could cause a distraction. accessories, and that accessory installa- bility for death, injury, or expenses that For all of these systems, we want to provide the tions be performed only by a trained and may result from the installation of non-gen- following warning that reflects the strong Volvo qualified Volvo service technician. uine accessories. concern for your safety. Never use these devi- • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way that ensure compatibility with the performance, distracts you from the task of driving safely. safety, and emission systems in your vehi- Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified addition to this general warning, we offer the Volvo service technician knows where following guidance regarding specific newer accessories may and may not be safely features that may be found in your vehicle installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv- • Never use a hand-held cellular telephone ice technician before installing any acces- while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit sory in or on your vehicle.

12 Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment cles and parts have fulfilled their use, recycling cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus- is the next critical step in completing the life vehicle has started. tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, cycle. The metal content is about 75% of the • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related we care about the environment in which we all total weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehi- waste such as used motor oil, used batter- live. Caring for the environment means an cle among the most recycled industrial prod- ies, brake pads, etc. everyday involvement in reducing our environ- ucts. In order to have efficient and well-con- • When cleaning your vehicle, please use mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities trolled recycling, dismantling information is genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo are based on a holistic view, which means we available for all Volvo models. For Volvo, all car care products are formulated to be consider the overall environmental impact of a homogeneous plastic parts weighing more environmentally friendly. product throughout its complete life cycle. In than 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with inter- this context, design, production, product use, national symbols that indicate how the com- and recycling are all important considerations. ponent is to be sorted for recycling. In addition In production, Volvo has partly or completely to continuous environmental refinement of phased out several chemicals including CFCs, conventional gasoline-powered internal com- lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and bustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at reduced the number of chemicals used in our advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. plants 50% since 1991. When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on production a three-way catalytic converter with the environment. To reduce your vehicle's a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen environmental impact, you can: sensor, in 1976. The current version of this • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. highly efficient system reduces emissions of Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the omy with improperly inflated tires. exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and • Follow the recommended maintenance the search to eliminate the remaining emis- schedule in your Warranty and Service sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile Records Information booklet. manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for Drive at a constant speed whenever pos- the air conditioning system of all models as far • sible. back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are • See a trained and qualified Volvo service bringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehi- technician as soon as possible for inspection if the check engine (malfunction indi-

13 14 hl aeylcs...... 50 Child safetylocks...... Integrated boostercushion Child restraintregistrationand 46 Top tetheranchors...... ISOFIX loweranchors Booster cushions Convertible seats 40 Infant seats...... Child restraintsystems Child safety Crash mode Whiplash ProtectionSystem– Volvo InflatableCurtain Side impactprotection(SIPS) Occupant WeightSensor 21 Supplemental RestraintSystem(SRS)...... 18 Seat belts...... 17 Reporting safetydefects...... 16 Occupant safety...... 36 ...... 35 ...... 42 ...... 44 ...... 45 ...... 38 ...... (VIC) ...... 26 ...... 48 ...... 32 ...... airbags WHIPS recalls ...... 47 ...... 33 ...... 30 ......

G020871 SAFETY 01 01 Safety

01 Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety • Never drink and drive. Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern • If you are taking any medication, consult dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled your physician about its potential effects off the production line. Three-point seat belts on your driving abilities. (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy- • Take a driver-retraining course. absorbing impact zones were designed into • Have your eyes checked regularly. Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable or required by government regulation. • Keep your windshield and headlights clean. We will not compromize our commitment to Replace wiper blades when they start to safety. We continue to seek out new safety • leave streaks. features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hear- • Take into account the traffic, road, and ing your suggestions about improving automo- weather conditions, particularly with bile safety. We also want to know if you ever regard to stopping distance. have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: 1-800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old you are but rather on: • How well you see. • Your ability to concentrate. • How quickly you make decisions under stress to avoid an accident. The following suggestions are intended to help you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.

16 01 Safety

Reporting safety defects 01

Reporting safety defects in the U.S. http://www.safercar.gov Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a Volvo strongly recommends that if If you believe your vehicle has a defect that defect which could cause a crash or could cause a crash or could cause injury or your vehicle is covered under a serv- death, you should immediately inform Trans- could cause injury or death, you ice campaign, safety or emission port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars should immediately inform the recall or similar action, it should be of Canada Corp. National Highway Traffic Safety completed as soon as possible. To contact Transport Canada, call Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Please check with your local retailer (800) 333 – 0510, or (613) 993 – 9851 if you are notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer- or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC calling from the Ottawa region. ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar if your vehicle is covered under these complaints, it may open an investiga- conditions. tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may NHTSA can be reached at: order a recall and remedy campaign. Internet: However, NHTSA cannot become http://www.nhtsa.gov involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Volvo Telephone: Cars of North America, LLC. To con- 1-888-DASH-2-DOT tact NHTSA, you may either call the (1-888-327-4236). Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- portation, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from:

17 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

General information in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces NOTE exerted by the seat belt on the occupant. Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) Buckling a seat belt is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch which is designed to help keep the seat belt plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far as possible. If this is done, heard. The seat belt retractor is normally a sound from the seat belt retractor will be "unlocked" and you can move freely, provided audible, which is normal, and the seat belt that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far. will be pulled taut and locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol- seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted. lowing situations:

The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol- See also page See page 37 for information lowing situations: Adjusting the seat belt about using a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to • if the belt is pulled out rapidly anchor a child seat. Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- • during braking and acceleration pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop- When wearing the seat belt remember: erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster • if the vehicle is leaning excessively • The belt should not be twisted or turned. seat determined by age, weight and height. • when driving in turns • The lap section of the belt must be posi- Volvo also believes no child should sit in the • if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- tioned low on the hips (not pressing against the abdomen). front seat of a vehicle. gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is activated • Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled Most states and provinces make it mandatory up into its retractor and that the shoulder for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. and lap belts are taut. Seat belt pretensioners Unbuckling the seat belt All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners To remove the seat belt, press the red section that reduce slack in the belts. These preten- on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the sioners are triggered in situations where the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully front or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer- after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the tain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts belt back into the retractor slot. also include a tension reducing device which,

18 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

Seat belt maintenance WARNING Seat belt reminder Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild deter- • Never repair the belt yourself; have this gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism work done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on the strap. • Any device used to induce slack into the shoulder belt portion of the three-point WARNING belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection avail- Never use a seat belt for more than one able to you in the event of a collision. occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion The seat back should not be tilted too of the belt under the arm, behind the back • or otherwise out of position. Such use could far back. The shoulder belt must be taut cause injury in the event of an accident. As in order to function properly. G017726 seat belts lose much of their strength when • Do not use child safety seats or child Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console exposed to violent stretching, they should booster cushions/backrests in the front The seat belt reminder consists of an audible be replaced after any collision, even if they passenger's seat. We also recommend appear to be undamaged. that children who have outgrown these signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir- devices sit in the rear seat with the seat ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that belt properly fastened. alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their seat belts. The audible signal and warning light will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the time the ignition is switched on, regardless of whether or not the seat belts are fastened. If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and warning light will be active for a total of 6 seconds.

Rear seats The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions:

19 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

• It provides information about which seat Seat belt use during pregnancy a distance as possible between their belly and belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes- the steering wheel. sage will appear in the information display when a belt is being used. This message Child seats will disappear after approximately 6 sec- Please refer to page 38 for information on onds or can be erased by pressing the securing child seats with the seat belts. READ button on the left steering wheel lever. • It also provides a reminder if one of the occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be

given. These signals will stop when the G020998 seat belt has been re-buckled or can be stopped by pressing the READ button. The seat belt should always be worn during The message in the information display can pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the always be accessed, even if it has been erased, correct way. The diagonal section should wrap by pressing the READ button to display stored over the shoulder then be routed between the messages. breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the body without any twists. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). Within this context, they should strive to position the seat with as large

20 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

General information properly, the general warning symbol illumi- WARNING nates and a text message will be displayed. See also page 76 and page 78 for more If your vehicle has been subjected to flood information about indicator and warning sym- conditions (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your bols. vehicle has become flood-damaged in any way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or WARNING insert the remote key into the ignition slot before disconnecting the battery (see • If the SRS warning light stays on after below). This may cause airbag deployment the engine has started or if it illuminates which could result in personal injury. Have while you are driving, have the vehicle the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs. Volvo service technician as soon as G022831 Automatic transmission: possible. Before attempting to tow the vehicle: Warning symbols in the instrument panel • Never try to repair any component or As an enhancement to the three-point seat part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer- 1. Switch off the ignition for at least belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple- ence in the system could cause mal- 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS function and serious injury. All work on 2. Follow the instructions for manually these systems should be performed by consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air- overriding the shiftlock system on page a trained and qualified Volvo service bags, side impact airbags, a front passenger 114. technician. occupant weight sensor, and inflatable cur- Please be aware that overriding the shiftlock tains. All of these systems are monitored by the system does not release the steering wheel SRS control module. An SRS warning light in lock. the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in modes I, II, or III, and will normally go out after approximately 6 seconds if no faults are detected in the system. Where applicable, a text message will also be displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning

21 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Front airbags The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove compartment.

WARNING • The airbags in the vehicle are designed to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replacement for–the three-point seat belts. For maximum protection, wear seat belts at all times. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. G018665 Location of the passenger's side front airbag • Never drive a vehicle with a steering As the movement of the seats' occupants com- wheel-mounted airbag with your hands The front airbag system presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel- on the steering wheel pad/airbag hous- The front airbags supplement the three-point led at a controlled rate to provide better cush- ing. seat belts. For these airbags to provide the ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also protection intended, seat belts must be worn • The front airbags are designed to help deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire prevent serious injury. Deployment at all times. process, including inflation and deflation of the occurs very quickly and with consider- The front airbag system includes gas genera- airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec- able force. During normal deployment tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- ond. and depending on variables such as tion sensors that activate the gas generators, The location of the front airbags is indicated by seating position, one may experience causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other gas. pad and above the glove compartment, and by injuries as a result from deployment of one or both of the airbags. decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash. • When installing any accessory equipment, make sure that the front airbag The driver's side front airbag is folded and system is not damaged. Any interfer- located in the steering wheel hub. ence in the system could cause malfunction.

22 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

Front airbag deployment WARNING 1-800-458-1552 • The front airbags are designed to deploy www.volvocars.us during certain frontal or front-angular col- • Do not use child safety seats or child lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend- booster cushions/backrests in the front In Canada passenger's seat. We also recommend ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. object impacted. The airbags may also that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches deploy in certain non-frontal collisions (140 cm) in height who have outgrown National Customer Service where rapid deceleration occurs. these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened1. 175 Gordon Baker Road • The SRS sensors, which trigger the front airbags, are designed to react to both the • Never drive with the airbags deployed. North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 impact of the collision and the inertial The fact that they hang out can impair 1-800-663-8255 forces generated by it, and to determine if the steering of your vehicle. Other the intensity of the collision is sufficient for safety systems can also be damaged. www.volvocanada.com the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags • The smoke and dust formed when the to be deployed. airbags are deployed can cause skin However, not all frontal collisions activate the and eye irritation in the event of pro- front airbags. longed exposure. • If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed Should you have questions about any compo- object at a low speed, the front airbags will nent in the SRS system, please contact a not necessarily deploy. trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo Customer Support: • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a side impact collision, in a collision from the In the USA rear or in a rollover situation. Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • The amount of damage to the bodywork does not reliably indicate if the airbags Customer Care Center should have deployed or not. 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information see page 26.

23 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

NOTE Airbag decals WARNING • Deployment of front airbags occurs only • Children must never be allowed in the one time during an accident. In a colli- front passenger's seat. Volvo recom- sion where deployment occurs, the air- mends that ALL occupants (adults and bags and seat belt pretensioners acti- children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches vate. Some noise occurs and a small (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of amount of powder is released. The any vehicle with a passenger-side front release of the powder may appear as airbag. smoke-like matter. This is a normal • Occupants in the front passenger's seat characteristic and does not indicate fire. must never sit on the edge of the seat, • Volvo's front airbags use special sen- G008335 sit leaning toward the instrument panel sors that are integrated with the front Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors or otherwise sit out of position. seat buckles. The point at which the air- • The occupant's back must be as upright bag deploys is determined by whether as comfort allows and be against the or not the seat belt is being used, as well seat back with the seat belt properly as the severity of the collision. fastened. • Collisions can occur where only one of • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the airbags deploys. If the impact is less the dash, seat or out of the window. severe, but severe enough to present a clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity. G032527

Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard

24 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

WARNING • No objects or accessory equipment, e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed on, attached to, or installed near the air bag hatch (the area above the glove compartment) or the area affected by airbag deployment (see the illustration on page 22). • There should be no loose articles, such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dashboard area. • Never try to open the airbag cover on the steering wheel or the passenger's side dashboard. This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

25 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

General information The OWS works with sensors that are part of airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead sensors are designed to detect the presence of console, near the base of the rearview mirror. a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be 2 NOTE enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not inflate). When the ignition is switched on, the OWS indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- while the system performs a self-diagnostic senger's side front airbag when: test. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, 2 or has small/medium objects in the front However, if a fault is detected in the system:

G017724 seat, • The OWS indicator light will stay on Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light • the system determines that an infant is • The SRS warning light (see page 21) will present in a rear-facing infant seat that is come on and stay on Disabling the passenger's side front installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, • The message PASS AIRBAG OFF airbag SERVICE URGENT will be displayed in Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults • the system determines that a small child is the information display. and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches present in a forward-facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufac- (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any WARNING vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and turer's instructions, be properly restrained for their size and weight. • the system determines that a small child is If a fault in the system is detected and indi- For child safety recommendations, see present in a booster seat, cated as described, be aware that the pas- page 37. senger's side front airbag will not deploy in • a front passenger takes his/her weight off the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is of the seat for a period of time, system and Occupant Weight Sensor designed to meet the regulatory requirements • a child or a small person occupies the front should be inspected by a trained and quali- of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard passenger's seat. fied Volvo service technician as soon as (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will possible. The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on under certain conditions. to remind you that the passenger's side front

26 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

WARNING Passeng- OWS indi- Passeng- The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off. • Never try to open, remove, or repair any er's seat cator light er's side components in the OWS system. This occu- status front air- If a person of adult size is sitting in the front could result in system malfunction. pancy sta- bag status passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR- Maintenance or repairs should only be tus BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that carried out by an a trained and qualified the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If Volvo service technician. Seat unoc- OWS indica- Passenger's this happens: cupied tor light side front The front passenger's seat should not • lights up. airbag disa- • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to be modified in any way. This could place the seatback in an upright position. bled reduce pressure on the seat cushion, • Have the person sit upright in the seat, which might interfere with the OWS sys- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's centered on the seat cushion, with the per- tem's function. pied by low tor light side front son's legs comfortably extended. weight lights up airbag disa- • Restart the vehicle and have the person occupant/ bled remain in this position for about two objectA minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the pas- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's senger's frontal airbag. pied by tor light is side front heavy occu- not lit airbag ena- • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator pant/object bled lamp remains on even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat. A Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do This condition reflects limitations of the OWS not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled classification capability. It does not indicate unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is OWS malfunction. any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. Modifications The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) If you are considering modifying your vehicle in the passenger's side front airbag anytime the any way to accommodate a disability, for system senses that a person of adult size is example by altering or adapting the driver's or sitting properly in the front passenger's seat. front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at:

27 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

In the USA WARNING WARNING Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • No objects that add to the total weight • Keep the following points in mind with Customer Care Center on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to front passenger's seat. If a child is follow these instructions could 1 Volvo Drive seated in the front passenger's seat adversely affect the system's function P.O. Box 914 with any additional weight, this extra and result in serious injury to the occu- weight could cause the OWS system to pant of the front passenger's seat: Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 enable the airbag, which might cause it • The full weight of the front seat passen- 1-800-458-1552 to deploy in the event of a collision, ger should always be on the seat cush- thereby injuring the child. In Canada ion. The passenger should never lift • The seat belt should never be wrapped him/herself off the seat cushion using Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. around an object on the front passeng- the armrest in the door or the center National Customer Service er's seat. This could interfere with the console, by pressing the feet on the OWS system's function. floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario • The front passenger's seat belt should cushion, or by pressing against the M2H 2N7 never be used in a way that exerts more backrest in a way that reduces pressure on the seat cushion. This could cause 1-800-663-8255 pressure on the passenger than normal. This could increase the pressure exer- OWS to disable the front, passenger's ted on the weight sensor by a child, and side airbag. could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.

28 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

WARNING • Do not place any type of object on the front passenger's seat in such a way that jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 37). • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.

29 01 Safety

01 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

General information G024377 G032254

G032949 SIPS airbag deployment SIPS decal on the front of the driver's door opening Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs seats only) only on the side of the vehicle affected by the NOTE As an enhancement to the structural side impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy impact protection built into your vehicle, it is in all side impact situations. SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by also equipped with Side Impact Protection the impact. The airbags are not designed to System (SIPS) airbags. deploy in all side impact situations. The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of Components in the SIPS airbag system certain side impact collisions. The SIPS air- This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas gen- bags are designed to deploy only during cer- erator, the side airbag modules built into the tain side-impact collisions, depending on the outboard sides of both front seat backrests, crash severity, angle, speed and point of and electronic sensors/wiring. impact.

30 01 Safety

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags 01

WARNING • The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Pro- tection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. • Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.

31 01 Safety

01 Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)

General information WARNING WARNING • The VIC system is a supplement to the In order for the VIC to provide its best pro- Side Impact Protection System. It is not tection, both front seat occupants and both designed to deploy during collisions outboard rear seat occupants should sit in from the front or rear of the vehicle or in an upright position with the seat belt prop- rollover situations. erly fastened; adults using the seat belt and children using the proper child restraint sys- • Never try to open or repair any compo- tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats. nents of the VIC system. This should be Children must never be allowed in the front done only by a trained and qualified passenger seat, see page 37 for guide- Volvo service technician. lines. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an Never hang heavy items from the ceiling • accident. handles. This could impede deployment of the Inflatable Curtain. This system consists of inflatable curtains • The rear seat should not be loaded to a located along the sides of the roof liners, level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the stretching from the center of both front side upper edge of the rear side windows. windows to the rear edge of the rear side door Objects placed higher than this level windows. It is designed to help protect the could impede the function of the Volvo heads of the occupants of the front seats and Inflatable Curtain. the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions. In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur- tain (VIC) and the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The VIC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains inflated for approximately 3 seconds.

32 01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS 01

General information Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – WARNING front seats only Occupants in the front seats must never The WHIPS system consists of specially • sit out of position. The occupant's back designed hinges and brackets on the front seat must be as upright as comfort allows backrests designed to help absorb some of the and be against the seat back with the energy generated in a collision from the rear seat belt properly fastened. (when the vehicle is rear-ended). • If your vehicle has been involved in a In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges rear-end collision, the front seat backr- and brackets of the front seat backrests are ests must be inspected by a trained and designed to change position slightly to allow qualified Volvo service technician, even the backrest/head restraint to help support the if the seats appear to be undamaged. occupant's head before moving slightly rear- Certain components in the WHIPS sys- ward. This movement helps absorb some of tem may need to be replaced. the forces that could result in whiplash. • Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself. WARNING • The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in your vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. • The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear, depending on the crash severity, angle and speed. G021842 G021018

33 01 Safety

01 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS

WARNING WARNING • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind Any contact between the front seat backr- the front seats could impede the func- ests and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing tion of the WHIPS system. child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded • If the rear seat backrests are folded down, the occupied front seats must be down, cargo must be secured to pre- adjusted forward so that they do not touch vent it from sliding forward against the the folded rear seat. front seat backrests in the event of a collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system. G018567

34 01 Safety

Crash mode 01

function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, 3. Try to start the vehicle. sensors for one of the safety systems, the brake system, etc. Moving the vehicle If the electrical system is able to reset system WARNING status to normal (Safety mode See manual will no longer be shown in the display), the • Never attempt to repair the vehicle vehicle may be moved carefully from its pres- yourself or to reset the electrical system ent position, if for example, it is blocking traffic. after the vehicle has displayed Safety It should, however, not be moved farther than mode See manual. This could result in is absolutely necessary. injury or improper system function.

G022831 • Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- WARNING ing status should only be done by a Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable Driving after a collision trained and qualified Volvo service technician. after Safety mode has been set, it should If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, not be driven or towed (pulled by another the text Safety mode See manual may • After Safety mode See manual has vehicle). There may be concealed damage appear in the information display. This indi- been displayed, if you detect the odor that could make it difficult or impossible to cates that the vehicle's functionality has been of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel control. The vehicle should be transported reduced. leakage, do not attempt to start the on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali- vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. fied Volvo service technician for inspection/ repairs. NOTE This text can only be shown if the display is Attempting to start the vehicle undamaged and the vehicle's electrical sys- If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is tem is intact. no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the vehicle. To do so: Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one 1. Remove the remote control from the igni- or more of the safety systems (e.g. front or side tion slot. airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of 2. Reinsert the remote in the ignition slot. The the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The vehicle will then attempt to reset Safety collision may have damaged an important mode to normal status.

35 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Children should be seated safely restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring When a child has outgrown the child safety Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint or increasing the injury of a child. seat, you should use the rear seat with the standard seat belt fastened. The best way to systems for all occupants including children. All states and provinces have legislation gov- help protect the child here is to place the child Remember that, regardless of age and size, a erning how and where children should be car- on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly child should always be properly restrained in a ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist- located on the hips (see the illustration on page vehicle. ing in your state or province. Recent accident 44). Legislation in your state or province may statistics have shown that children are safer in Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in rear seating positions than front seating posi- LATCH attachments, which make it more con- combination with the seat belt, depending on tions when properly restrained. A child restraint venient to install child seats. the child's age and/or size. Please check local system can help protect a child in a vehicle. regulations. Some restraint systems for children are Here's what to look for when selecting a child designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap restraint system: A specially designed and tested booster cush- belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. ion can be obtained from your Volvo retailer. Such child restraint systems can help protect It should have a label certifying that it meets children in vehicles in the event of an accident applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. only if they are used properly. However, chil- Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, (15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) dren could be endangered in a crash if the child CMVSS 213. in height restraints are not properly secured in the vehi- Make sure the child restraint system is Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions approved for the child's height, weight and (18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm) for your child restraint can result in your child development – the label required by the stand- in height striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. ard or regulation, or instructions for infant Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable restraints, typically provide this information. substitute for a child restraint system. In an In using any child restraint system, we urge you accident, a child held in a person's arms can to carefully look over the instructions that are be crushed between the vehicle's interior and provided with the restraint. Be sure you under- an unrestrained person. The child could also be stand them and can use the device properly injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec- and safely in this vehicle. A misused child ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver restraint system can result in increased injuries or impact. The same can also happen if the for both the infant or child and other occupants infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. in the vehicle. Other occupants should also be properly

36 01 Safety

Child safety 01

WARNING When attaching the seat belt to a child Volvo has some very specific seat: recommendations: Do not use child safety seats or child • 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat • Always wear your seat belt. booster cushions/backrests in the front according to the child seat manufacturer's passenger's seat. We also recommend • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety instructions. that children under 4 feet 7 inches device which, when used with a three- (140 cm) in height who have outgrown 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. point seat belt can help reduce serious these devices sit in the rear seat with the injuries during certain types of accidents. 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the seat belt fastened. Volvo recommends that you do not dis- buckle (lock) in the usual way. connect the airbag system in your vehicle. • Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked and keep remote controls out of a 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone child’s reach. Unsupervised children the child seat. in the vehicle be properly restrained. could lock themselves in an open trunk A sound from the seat belt retractor will be • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants and risk injury. Children should be audible at this time and is normal. The belt will (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet taught not to play in vehicles. now be locked in place. This function is auto- 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back • On hot days, the temperature in the matically disabled when the seat belt is seat of any vehicle with a front passenger vehicle interior can rise very quickly. unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. side airbag. Exposure to these high temperatures Drive safely! for even a short period of time can Volvo's recommendations cause heat-related injury or death. Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit Small children are particularly at risk. in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite simple really. A front airbag is a very powerful device designed, by law, to help protect an adult. Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ Because of the size of the airbag and its speed ELR) of inflation, a child should never be placed in the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel- To make child seat installation easier, each ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- has been an innovator in safety for over sev- ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our seat belt taut. part. But we need your help. Please remember to put your children in the back seat, and buckle them up.

37 01 Safety

01 Child restraint systems

Child restraints G022847 G023269

G022840 Convertible seat Booster cushion Infant seat WARNING WARNING There are three main types of child restraint systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac- booster cushions. They are classified accord- front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information ing to the child's age and size. front passenger airbag – not even if the on securing the restraint. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the The following section provides general infor- rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles mation on securing a child restraint using a equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If three-point seat belt. Refer to page 45–46 the severity of an accident were to cause the for information on securing a child restraint airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this posi- using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether tion. anchorages.

38 01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.

39 01 Safety

01 Infant seats

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. G023270

G022844 Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng- plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct er's seat WARNING click is audible. • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing NOTE position only. Refer to page 45–46 for information on • The infant seat should not be positioned securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower behind the driver's seat unless there is anchors and/or top tether anchorages. adequate space for safe installation.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. G023271 Fasten the seat belt

40 01 Safety

Infant seats 01 G022846 G022850

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure that out as far as possible to activate the belt's it is held securely in place by the seat belt. automatic locking function. WARNING NOTE It should not be possible to move the child The locking retractor will automatically restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) release when the seat belt is unbuckled and in any direction along the seat belt path. allowed to retract fully. The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the the seat belt and letting it retract completely. seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.

41 01 Safety

01 Convertible seats

Securing a convertible seat with a seat WARNING belt • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be instal-

G022847 led in the rear seat only. Route the seat belt through the convertible seat • A rear-facing convertible seat should not

G018630 be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas- WARNING installation. senger's seat Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the con- NOTE vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat tions. according to the manufacturer's instruc- Refer to pages 45 and 46 for information tions. on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether ancho- 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat rages. of the vehicle.

Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.

42 01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G022848 G022850

Fasten the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch G022849 plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt WARNING click is audible. 6. Push and pull the convertible seat to A child seat should never be used in the 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt ensure that it is held securely in place by front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the out as far as possible to activate the belt's the seat belt. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the automatic locking function. rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity WARNING of an accident were to cause the airbag to NOTE inflate, this could lead to serious injury or It should not be possible to move the child death to a child seated in this position. The locking retractor will automatically restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) release when the seat belt is unbuckled and in any direction along the seat belt path. allowed to retract fully. The convertible seat can be removed by 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A completely. sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this

43 01 Safety

01 Booster cushions

Securing a booster cushion G022852

G022851 Positioning the seat belt Position the child correctly on the booster cushion 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and Booster cushions are recommended for chil- fits snugly around the child. dren who have outgrown convertible seats. WARNING 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle. • The hip section of the three-point seat belt must fit snugly across the child's 2. With the child properly seated on the hips, not across the stomach. booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the man- • The shoulder section of the three-point ufacturer's instructions. seat belt should be positioned across the chest and shoulder. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch • The shoulder belt must never be placed plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct behind the child's back or under the click is audible. arm.

44 01 Safety

ISOFIX lower anchors 01

Using the ISOFIX lower child seat 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down anchors the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. 3. Fasten the attachment on the child restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX lower anchors. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions.

NOTE G018631 Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX The rear seat's center position is not G021064 • lower anchors equipped with ISOFIX lower anchors. ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors When installing a child restraint in this WARNING Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped child position, attach the restraint's top tether seats are located in the rear, outboard seats, strap (if it is so equipped) to the top • Be sure to fasten the attachment cor- tether anchorage point and secure the hidden below the backrest cushions. Symbols rectly to the anchor (see the illustration). restraint with the vehicle's center seat on the seat back upholstery mark the anchor If the attachment is not correctly fas- belt. positions as shown. To access the anchors, tened, the child restraint may not be properly secured in the event of a colli- kneel on the seat cushion and locate the • Always follow your child seat manufac- sion. anchors by feel. Always follow your child seat turer's installation instructions, and use manufacturer's installation instructions, and both ISOFIX lower anchors and top • The ISOFIX lower child restraint use both ISOFIX lower anchors and top tethers tethers whenever possible. anchors are only intended for use with whenever possible. child seats positioned in the outboard seating positions. These anchors are To access the anchors not certified for use with any child 1. Put the child restraint in position. restraint that is positioned in the center seating position. When securing a child restraint in the center seating position, use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

45 01 Safety

01 Top tether anchors

Child restraint anchorages child restraint using the Automatic Locking Retractor seat belt (see page 37). 5. Firmly tension all straps. Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's instructions for information on securing the child seat.

WARNING • Never route a top tether strap over the top of the head restraint. The strap should be routed beneath the head G021068 restraint. Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top • Child restraint anchorages are designed tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are to withstand only those loads imposed located on the rear parcel shelf. by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used Securing a child seat for adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not able to withstand 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. excessive forces on them in the event of 2. Fold up the plastic cover over the anchor- collision if full harness seat belts or adult age to be used. seat belts are installed to them. An adult who uses a belt anchored in a child 3. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint anchorage runs a great risk of restraint and attach it to the anchor. suffering severe injuries should a colli- 4. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO- sion occur. FIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is • Do not install rear speakers that require not equipped with lower tether straps, or the removal of the top tether anchors or the restraint is used in the center seating interfere with the proper use of the top position, follow instructions for securing a tether strap.

46 01 Safety

Child restraint registration and recalls 01

Registering a child restraint Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints. Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern- ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

47 01 Safety

01 Integrated booster cushion

Integrated booster cushion*1 Canada's weight recommendation is 40-80 lbs (18-36 kg). The booster cushion is designed to raise the child higher, so that the shoulder strap crosses over the child's collarbone, not over the child's neck. If using a booster cushion does not result in proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the child should be placed in a properly G021071 secured child restraint (see page 38). The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm.

Using the integrated booster cushion Volvo's optional integrated booster cushion is located in the center seating position. This booster cushion has been specially designed to help safeguard a child in the rear seat. It G021072 should be stowed (folded up into the rear seat backrest) when not in use. When using an inte- Fold down the booster cushion from the grated booster cushion, the child must be rear seat backrest. secured with the vehicle's three-point seat G021070 belt. Loosen the Velcro strip. Use this booster cushion only with Fold up the backrest section of the booster children who weigh between 33 and cushion into the upright position. 80 lbs (15 and 36 kg) and whose Before driving, check that: height is between 38 and 54 in (97 and 137 cm). In Canada, Transport

1 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion 01

• The seat belt is properly positioned and is WARNING taut. • The shoulder section of the seat belt is DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can across the child's collarbone, not over the occur neck. Follow all instructions on the • The lap section of the seat belt is across booster cushion and in the vehi- the child's hips and not the abdomen. cle's owner's manual. Stowing the integrated booster cushion G021076 MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER Fold down the backrest section of the CUSHION IS SECURELY booster cushion. LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. Fasten the Velcro strip. • Use this booster cushion only with chil- Fold up the booster cushion into the rear dren who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs seat backrest. (15 and 36 kg) and whose height is between 38 and 54 in (97 and 137 cm). G021074 NOTE In Canada, Transport Canada's weight recommendation is 40-80 lbs (18-36 See also the instructions on the integrated kg). booster cushion. • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and G021075 qualified Volvo service technician only.

49 01 Safety

01 Child safety locks

Child safety locks NOTE There are no manual child safety locks on vehicles equipped with the optional power child safety locks.

WARNING Remember, in the event of an accident, the rear seat passengers cannot open the doors from the inside with the controls in position A (manual child safety locks) or if the power G019300 child safety lock function is activated. G021077 Power child safety locks* Manual child safety locks – rear doors The power child lock function can be activated The controls are located on the rear door by pressing the button shown in the inset illus- jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a tration above. The ignition must be in mode I screwdriver to adjust these controls. or II (see page 82). The rear doors can only be opened from When the function is activated, a message will the outside when the slot is in the horizon- appear in the information display and the indi- tal position. cator light in the button will light up. The rear doors can be opened from the With the function activated: inside when the slot is in the vertical posi- • The rear door windows can only be opened tion. with the control in the driver's door. • The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside.

50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Safety

51 Remote key and key blade...... 54 Valet locking ...... 61 Keyless drive...... 62 Locks...... 65 Alarm...... 68

52 LOCKS AND ALARM 02 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Introduction tion on the valet locking function. The key The number of registered keys for the vehicle Two remote keys or optional Personal Car blades have a unique code, which is used if can be found in the vehicle's menu under Car 02 Communicators (PCC) are provided with your new ones need to be produced. This code is settings Car key memory vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors available at an authorized Volvo retailer. Number of keys. See page 124 for a descrip- and trunk, and also function as ignition keys to tion of the menu system. Loss of a remote key start the vehicle or operate electrical compo- If either of the remote keys is lost, the other USA-5WK49264 nents. The remote keys contain detachable should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer. metal key blades for manually locking or FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost unlocking the driver's door and the glove com- 5WK49236 remote key must be erased from the system. partment. Up to six remotes can be pro- FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266 grammed for use on the same vehicle. NOTE FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO The PCCs have enhanced functionality com- 5WK49233 pared with the standard remote key. Additional or duplicate remote control keys can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo FCC ID:KR55WK49233 Retailer. NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC You can also obtain additional or duplicate rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the In the remainder of this chapter, all referen- remote control keys from certain independ- ces to the remote key also pertain to the ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are following conditions: (1) This device may not PCC unless otherwise stated. qualified to make remote control keys. Each cause harmful interference, and (2) this device key must be programmed to work with your must accept any interference received, includ- vehicle. ing interference that may cause undesired WARNING California Only: operation. Never leave the remote key in the ignition if A list of independent repair facilities and/or Canada-5WK49264 children are to remain in the vehicle. locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO code replacement keys can be found: 5WK49236 Detachable key blade on the Volvo website at • IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266 Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys metal key blade for mechanically locking or by calling Volvo Customer Care at IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO unlocking the driver's door and the glove com- • 1-800-458-1552 5WK49233 partment, and to enable the valet locking function. See page 59 for more information on the IC:267T-5WK49233 key blade and page see page 61 for informa-

54 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Operation is subject to the following condi- When the vehicle is locked, confirmation will Message Meaning tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- only be given if all of the locks are locked after ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- the doors have been closed. Key error Reinsert Remote key not rec- 02 ference, including interference that may cause key ognized during start. undesired operation of the device. NOTE Try to start the vehicle again. Key memory – door mirrors and driver's If you do not receive confirmation when seat locking the vehicle, check whether a door or Car key not found PCC with keyless the trunk is ajar, or if this feature has been drive only. Remote The position of the side door mirrors and turned off in the menu. optional power driver's seat are stored in the key not recognized remote keys when the vehicle is locked. The during start. Try to next time the driver's door is unlocked with the This function can be activated or deactivated start the vehicle same remote key and the door is opened within under Car settings Light settings again. 2 minutes, the power driver's seat and side Lock confirmation light or Car settings Immobilizer Try Remote key fault door mirrors will automatically move to the Light settings Unlock position that they were in when the doors were start again during start. Contact confirmation light. See page 124 for a an authorized Volvo most recently locked with the same remote description of the menu system. key. See page 85 for more information. workshop. This feature can be activated or deactivated in Immobilizer (start inhibitor) Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle the vehicle's menu under Car settings CAUTION contains a coded transponder. The code in the Car key memory Seat & mirror Never use force when inserting the remote key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot positions. See page 124 for a description of slot where it is compared to the code stored in be started if the transponder is damaged. the menu system. the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start only with a properly coded key. If you misplace See also page 62 for information regarding USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO vehicles with the optional keyless drive. a key, take the other keys to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for reprog- This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Confirmation when locking/unlocking ramming as an antitheft measure. The follow- rules. Operation is subject to the following con- the vehicle ing messages (which may appear in the instru- dition: (1) This device may not cause harmful When the vehicle is locked with a remote key, ment panel display) are related to the immobil- interference, and (2) this device must accept the turn signals will flash once to confirm that izer: any interference received, including interfer- this has been completed correctly. ence that may cause undesired operation.

55 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO Common functions – Remote key/ Approach lighting Operation is subject to the following condi- Personal Car Communicator (PCC) 02 Trunk unlock/open tions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter- Panic alarm ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Information See page 109 for information on starting the Buttons on the remote vehicle. Lock – Press the Lock button on the remote once to lock all doors and the trunk. The turn Replacing the battery in the remote key signals will flash once to confirm locking. The batteries should be replaced if: Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the • The information symbol illuminates and remote once to unlock the driver's door. Replace car key battery is shown in the G021078 After a short pause, press the Unlock button a display and/or Remote key second time within 10 seconds to unlock the • if the locks do not react after several attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle. other doors and the trunk. This function can be changed so that all doors NOTE unlock at the same time under Car settings The remote key's range is normally approx- Lock settings Doors unlock. See imately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle. page 124 for a description of the menu system. See page 59 for information on replacing the Approach lighting – As you approach the battery. vehicle, press the button on the remote key to light the interior lighting, parking lights, license

G021079 plate lighting and the lights in the door mirrors*. Personal Car Communicator (PCC)* These lights will switch off automatically after Lock 30, 60 or 90 seconds, see page 124 for more information. Unlock

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Unlock/open trunk These lights will switch off automatically after Functions – PCC 30, 60 or 90 seconds, see page 124 for more Press once: This unlocks the trunk (but does information. 02 not open it) and disarms the alarm and optional movement sensor (the alarm indicator light on The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehi- the dashboard will go out). If the trunk is not cle. opened within two minutes it will automatically relock and the alarm will be rearmed. Range The remote key has a range of approximately Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle. pops it open slightly. NOTE NOTE

Buildings or other obstacles may interfere G021080 Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk with the function of the remote key. The lid may prevent it from opening. vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with Information button the key blade, see page 59. Indicator lights See also page 66 for information on opening the trunk from the passenger compartment. Pressing the information button provides cer- After closing, the trunk will not automatically tain information about the vehicle with the help relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the of the indicator lights. alarm. Using the information button Panic alarm – This button can be used to 1. Press the information button . attract attention during emergency situations. 2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequen- To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this tially for approximately 7 seconds to indi- button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice cate that the PCC is receiving information within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are be activated. The panic alarm will stop auto- pressed during this 7-second period, matically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds. transmission of information to the PCC will To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds be interrupted. and press the button again.

57 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE inside the vehicle. These lights are only If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock activated if the alarm has been triggered. the vehicle, only the one used most recently will 02 If none of the indicator lights flash when the show the correct locking status. information button has been pressed sev- Steady red light: the alarm has been trig- eral times from different places in relation to gered. the vehicle, contact an authorized Volvo NOTE Range service technician. If none of the indicator lights illuminate when The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a the information button is pressed, this may range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the The indicator lights provide information be because the most recent transmission vehicle. between the vehicle and the PCC was inter- according to the illustration: rupted or impeded by buildings or other NOTE objects. • The approach lighting, panic alarm, and the functions controlled by the informa- Heartbeat Sensor tion button have a range of approxi- The heartbeat sensor function is a comple- mately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle. ment to the vehicle's standard alarm, and indi- • Buildings or other obstacles may inter- cates at a distance of up to 300 ft (100 m) that fere with the function of the PCC. someone may be in the vehicle. The heartbeat sensor only functions if the alarm has been triggered. Outside of the PCC´s range If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft G030262 NOTE (100 m) from the vehicle when the information Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly button is pressed, no new information will be The heartbeat sensor registers a person's heartbeat in the form of vibrations in the locked. received. The PCC most recently used to lock or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's vehicle's chassis. For this reason, the sen- Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not most recently received status. The indicator sor's function may be impaired in areas with high levels of noise or vibrations. locked. lights will not flash when the information button Alternatively flashing red lights (Heartbeat is pressed while the PCC is out of range. sensor): if the two heartbeat sensor lights Keyless drive flash, this indicates that someone may be Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal Car Communicator have the keyless drive

58 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade function, see page 62 for detailed informa- Locking the doors with the detached key 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove tion. blade until it clicks into place. 02 1. Lock the rear doors and the front passeng- Detachable key blade er's door by pressing the lock button on Replacing batteries in the remote key/ each door. The key blade can be removed from the remote PCC key. When removed, the key blade can be used 2. Turn the key blade one-quarter turn coun- The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC as follows: ter-clockwise to lock the driver's door. should be replaced if: • To lock/unlock the driver's door Removing the key blade • The information symbol lights up and a text • To lock/unlock the glove compartment is shown in the information display. (see page 65) and/or • To enable/disable the valet locking func- • the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react tion (see page 61) when a button on the remote key/PCC is pressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m) Unlocking the doors with the detached from the vehicle. key blade Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clockwise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock the driver's door only. G021082

NOTE Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. After unlocking the driver's door with the key blade, opening the door will trigger the Pull the key blade straight out of the remote alarm. key. Reinserting the key blade in the remote To disable the alarm: key Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. 1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up. 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.

59 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE Re-assembling the remote key 1. Press the remote key's cover into place. 02 Turn the remote key with the buttons upward so that the batteries do not fall out 2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the when the cover is removed. key blade up. 3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. Replacing the batteries 4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place. CAUTION Old batteries should be properly recycled. When handling batteries, avoid touching their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–) sides. Remote key (one battery) 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old battery. Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the remote key, two batteries in the PCC) 2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward. Opening the remote key/PCC PCC (two batteries) Slide the spring loaded catch to the 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat- side. teries. Pull the key blade straight out of the 2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) side remote key. upward. Insert a small screwdriver in the hole 3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery. behind the spring loaded catch and care- Insert the second new battery on top of the fully pry up the cover. plastic spacer, with the + side downward.

60 02 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

Blocking access to the trunk to block access to the trunk and glove com- Turn the key blade180 degrees clockwise. partment for e.g., valet parking or when the vehicle is brought to the retailer for service. Remove the key blade from the lock. A 02 message will appear in the instrument With the valet locking function activated: panel display. • The vehicle's doors can be locked or unlocked with the remote Deactivating the valet locking function Turn the key blade 180 degrees counterclock- • The engine can be started wise in the glove compartment lock to deacti- • The glove compartment cannot be vate valet locking. unlocked See page 65 for information on locking the Access to the trunk is blocked (the trunk lid • glove compartment normally, without activat- cannot be unlocked or opened with the G021083 ing the valet locking function. remote, and the rear seat backrests cannot Normal locking/unlocking function be lowered Activating the valet locking function G021084

Locking/unlocking points with valet locking acti- G020508 vated By utilizing the remote key with the key blade Insert the key blade in the glove compart- removed, the valet locking feature enables you ment lock.

61 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

Keyless drive (models with Personal Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle Locking the vehicle Car Communicator only) have the keyless function, and additional ones The doors and the trunk can be locked by 02 can be ordered. The system can accommo- pressing the lock button in any of the outside Keyless locking and unlocking date up to six PCCs. door handles. The red rings in the illustration indicate the area around the vehicle covered by the keyless drive NOTE antennas. On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors Unlocking the vehicle and the trunk must be closed and the igni- • A keyless drive remote key must be on the tion must be switched off before the vehicle same side of the vehicle as the door to be can be locked. opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the lock or the trunk (see the shaded areas in the illustration). Keyless drive remote key and driver's seat/door mirror memory

G020577 Pull a door handle to unlock and open the • When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in door or press the trunk opening control on • your possession and lock any door, the Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft the trunk lid. (1.5 meters) position of the driver's seat will be stored The number of doors that are unlocked at the in the seat's memory. This system makes it possible to unlock and same time can be set in the vehicle's menu lock the vehicle without having to press any • The next time a door is opened by a person system, under Car settings Lock buttons on the Personal Car Communicators with the same PCC in his/her possession, (PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless settings Keyless entry. See page 124 the driver's seat and door mirrors will auto- drive remote key in your possession to operate for a description of the menu system. matically move to the position that they were in when the door was most recently the central locking system. NOTE locked. NOTE If the PCC does not function normally (weak The buttons on the keyless drive remote key battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked can also be used to lock and unlock the with the detachable key blade, see vehicle, see page 56 for more information. page 59.

62 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

NOTE CAUTION For Automobile Use If several people carrying PCCs approach • Keyless drive remote keys should never Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952, 02 the vehicle at the same time, the driver's be left in the vehicle. In the event of a 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 seat and door mirrors will assume the posi- break-in, a remote found in the vehicle NOTE tions they were in for the person who opens could make it possible to start the the driver's door. engine. This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following Electromagnetic fields or metal • two conditions: (1) This device may not cause See also page 85 for information on adjusting obstructions can interfere with the key- harmful interference, and (2) this device must and storing the seat's position in the seat mem- less drive system. Avoid placing the ory. remote key near cellular phones, metal- accept interference received, including inter- lic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase. ference that may cause undesired operation. Keyless drive information messages CAUTION If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle while the engine is running or if the ignition is USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964 Changes or modifications not expressly in mode II and all of the doors are closed, a NOTE approved by the manufacturer could void the message will appear in the instrument panel user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC display and an audible signal will sound. Rules. Operation is subject to the following two When at least one PCC has been returned to conditions: (1) This device may not cause Location of the keyless drive antennas the car, the message will be erased in the dis- harmful interference, and (2) this device must play and the audible signal will stop when: accept interference received, including inter- • A door has been opened and closed ference that may cause undesired operation. • The PCC has been inserted in the ignition CAUTION slot Changes or modifications not expressly • The READ button (see page 126 for the approved by the manufacturer could void the location of this button) has been pressed. user's authority to operate the equipment. Siemens VDO 5WK48891 G020479 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

63 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

The keyless drive system has a number of antennas located at various points in the vehi- 02 cle. On the inside center of the rear bumper Left rear door handle Center of the parcel shelf, on the underside Ceiling, above the center of the rear seat Right rear door handle Under the rear section of the center console Under the front section of the center console.

WARNING People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless drive system.

64 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Locking and unlocking the vehicle Unlocking Glove compartment Press the unlock button. From outside the vehicle 02 The remote key locks all of the doors and the Locking trunk. Press the lock button after the front doors have been closed. The first press on the unlock button unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the • Each door can be locked individually with other doors and the trunk (see also page 56). the lock button on the respective doors. The door must be closed first. NOTE • The door can be unlocked by pulling the door handle once and opened by pulling The vehicle cannot be locked if a door is the handle again.

open. G020548 Automatic relocking From inside the vehicle If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- The glove compartment can only be locked matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will and unlocked using the detachable key blade rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the trunk in the remote key. See page 59 for information has been opened. on removing the key blade from the remote key. Automatic locking When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and Insert the key blade in the glove compart- trunk can be locked automatically. This feature ment lock. can be turned on or off under Car settings Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. Lock settings Doors automatic lock. See page 124 for a description of the Remove the key blade from the lock. menu system.

The lock buttons on the door panel can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the trunk at the same time.

65 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Locking/unlocking the trunk The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will Opening the trunk from the passenger go out to indicate that the alarm is not moni- compartment 02 toring the entire vehicle. The accessory movement and inclination sensors will be automatically disconnected. When the trunk is closed again, it will relock, and all alarm functions will be reactivated. Locking the trunk with the remote key Press the lock button on the remote, see page 56

NOTE G022853 Trunk unlock button on the remote key • If the doors are locked while the trunk is open, the trunk will remain unlocked Unlocking the trunk with the remote key Press the button on the lighting panel until the vehicle is relocked by pressing Press the trunk unlock button on the to unlock and pop open the trunk remote. the Lock button on the remote key. On keyless drive vehicles, the gear Press once: This unlocks but does not open • selector must be in the Park (P) position, NOTE the trunk. The trunk can then be opened by all doors and the trunk must be closed The taillights will illuminate automatically for pressing the rubber plate near the trunk lock. If and the ignition must be switched off a short period when the trunk has been the trunk is not opened within two minutes it before the vehicle can be locked. opened. will automatically relock and the alarm will be rearmed. Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and pops it open slightly.

NOTE Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk lid may prevent it from opening.

66 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Unlocking the trunk with the key blade Opening the trunk from the inside (U.S. WARNING models only) • Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked 02 and keep keys out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an open trunk and risk injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles. • On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related

G022920 injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk. Opening the trunk from the inside The S80 is equipped with a florescent handle on the inside of the trunk lid, which can be used in an emergency situation to open the trunk from the inside. Pull the handle down to release the trunk lid. After use, the handle must be If the remote key is not functioning properly, pushed back into its original position before the the trunk can be unlocked with the detachable trunk can be closed. key blade. See page 59 for information on removing the key blade from the remote key. This handle is not intended to be used to anchor the trunk lid when long loads are being Pull out the cover over the trunk’s keyhole. transported. Unlock the trunk by inserting the key blade in the keyhole and turning a half turn counterclockwise as shown in the illustration.

67 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

The alarm system NOTE Arming the alarm The alarm is automatically armed whenever the Press the Lock button on the remote key. 02 Do not attempt to repair any of the compo- vehicle is locked with the remote key or nents in the alarm system yourself. This One long flash of the turn signals will con- optional Personal Car Communicator. could affect the insurance policy on the firm that the alarm is armed. When armed, the alarm continuously monitors vehicle. Alarm confirmation settings can be changed a number of points on the vehicle. The follow- under Car settings Lock settings ing conditions will trigger the alarm: The alarm indicator light Keyless entry. See page 124 for a descrip- • The hood is forced open. tion of the menu system. • The trunk is forced open USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) • A door is forced open. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC • The ignition slot is tampered with. rules. Operation is subject to the following con- • An attempt is made to start the vehicle with ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful a non-approved key (a key not coded to interference, and (2) this device must accept the car's ignition). any interference received, including interfer- • If there is movement in the passenger com- ence that may cause undesired operation. partment (if the vehicle is equipped with Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) the accessory movement sensor). • The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation is equipped with the accessory inclination The status of the alarm system is indicated by is subject to the following conditions: (1) this sensor). the indicator light on the dashboard (see illus- device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including • The battery is disconnected (while the tration): interference that may cause undesired opera- alarm is armed). Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed • tion of the device. • The siren is disconnected when the alarm • The indicator light flashes at one-second is disarmed. intervals – the alarm is armed A message will appear in the information dis- • The indicator light flashes rapidly before play if a fault should occur in the alarm system. the remote key is inserted in the ignition Contact an authorized Volvo service techni- slot – the alarm has been triggered. cian.

68 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

Disarming the alarm Remote key not functioning In certain situations it may be desirable to turn Press the Unlock button on the remote key. If the remote key is not functioning properly, off the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your 02 > Two short flashes from the car's direc- the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the tion indicators confirm that the alarm be started as follows: boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in has been deactivated and that all doors 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade. the vehicle with the doors locked. are unlocked. > This will trigger the alarm. The vehicle's menu system is used for turning 2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot. Turning off (stopping) the alarm off these sensors (see page 124 for a descrip- This will turn off the alarm. tion of the menu system). If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by pressing the Unlock button on the remote key 1. Go into the menu under Car settings. Reduced alarm function or by inserting the remote key in the ignition 2. Select Reduced guard See manual slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction Turning off the accessory alarm sensors (Press Enter to choose). indicators confirm that the alarm has been turned off. 3. Two alternatives are now available: • Activate once. If this alternative is Other alarm-related functions selected, Reduced guard See manual will appear in the instrument Automatic re-arming panel display and the accessory incli- If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- nation and movement alarm sensors will matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will be deactivated when the vehicle is re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the locked. trunk has been opened. • Ask on exit. If this alternative is selected, the message Press ENTER Audible/visual alarm signal to reduce guard until engine is • An audible alarm signal is given by a bat- started. Press EXIT to cancel. will Navigation (left/rght/up/down) buttons tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts appear in the center console display for 30 seconds. ENTER each time the engine is turned off and • The visual alarm signal is given by flashing the accessory inclination and move- all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes MENU ment alarm sensors will be deactivated or until the alarm is turned off. when the vehicle is locked. EXIT

69 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

4. Press ENTER and lock the vehicle.

02 The next time the engine is started, the alarm system will be reset and Full guard will appear in the instrument panel display. The accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be reactivated. In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to deactivate the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors, do not make a choice in the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.

70 02 Locks and alarm

71 72 *

Option/accessory, for more information, seeIntroduction. akn rk...... 118 Parking brake...... 116 Brakes...... 113 Transmission...... 109 Starting theengine...... HomeLink® WirelessControl Power moonroof 102 Mirrors...... 100 Power windows...... 98 Wipers andwashers...... 92 Lighting...... Steering wheel Seats 84 Seats...... Ignition modes Instruments andcontrols ಥ S80 Executive ...... 91 ...... 82 ...... 104 ...... 89 ...... 74 ...... System* ...... 106 ......

G020912 YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT 03 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

74 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Function Page Menus and mes- 124, 95, In-door control pan- 100, 102, Power seat* adjust- 84 sages, turn signals, 92, 155 els (power win- 50, 65 ment controls high/low beams, dows, mirrors, trip computer power child safety Lighting panel, but- 92, 204, tons for opening 66 locks, central lock- 03 Cruise control 161 ing button) fuel filler door and unlocking and Horn, airbag 91, 22 Menu controls, 124, 136, opening the trunk audio and climate 130 Main instrument 75 control systems panel Information displays Center console but- 124 Audio system/Blue- 135, 149 tons tooth hands-free controls Gear selector 113

Ignition slot 82 Controls for active 160 chassis (Four-C) START/STOP 82 ENGINE button Controls for active chassis (Four-C) - Hazard warning 94 certain models only flashers Wipers and washers 98, 99 Door handle – Steering wheel 91 Information displays in the instrument panel adjustment The information displays (1) show information on some of the vehicle's functions, such as Parking brake 118 cruise control, the trip computer and messages. The information is shown with text and Hood opening con- 219 symbols. trol

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

More detailed information can be found in the management system will automatically bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis- descriptions of the functions that use the infor- prevent excessively high engines speeds. engaged. mation displays. This will be noticeable as a pronounced If the engine does not start or if the function unevenness in engine speed. check is carried out in ignition mode II, all sym- Gauges bols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol Indicator, information, and warning for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and 03 symbols the symbol for low oil pressure. Certain symbols may not have their functions illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

Indicator and information symbols Symbol Description Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)*system

Gauges in the instrument panel Malfunction indicator light Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Anti-lock brake system (ABS) Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level Indicator and information symbols indicator in the gauge moves from right to Rear fog light on left as the amount of fuel in the tank Indicator and warning symbols decreases. See also the section on refueling beginning on page 202. See page High beam and turn signal indicators Stability system 155 for more information on fuel level and Function check consumption. Tire pressure monitoring sen- All indicator and warning symbols light up in The tachometer shows engine speed in sor (TPMS) ignition mode II or when the engine is started. thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine has started, all the symbols Do not drive continuously with the needle Low fuel level should go out except the parking brake sym- in the red area of the gauge. The engine

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Description not notice a change in your car's behavior. Rear fog light Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt This symbol indicates that the rear fog light Information symbol, see text fuel economy, emission controls, and drivabil- (located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is in information display ity. Extended driving without correcting the on. cause could even damage other components High beam indicator in your vehicle. Stability system This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC 03 Left turn signal indicator not closed tightly or if the engine was running (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys- while the vehicle was refueled. tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle, Right turn signal indicator see page 158 for more detailed information. Canadian models are equipped with this Tire pressure monitoring system symbol. (TPMS)* Fault in the Active Bending Light Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire (ABL) system warning light pressure in one or more tires is low, see This symbol will illuminate if the there is a fault If the warning light comes on, there may be a page 264 for detailed information. in the ABL system. malfunction in the ABS system (the standard Low fuel level braking system will still function). Check the When this light comes on, the vehicle should Malfunction Indicator Light system by: As you drive, a computer called On-Board be refueled as soon as possible. 1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's Information symbol engine, transmission, electrical and emission the ignition. The information symbol illuminates and a text systems. 2. Restart the engine. message is displayed if a fault is detected in The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) 3. If the warning light goes off, no further one of the vehicle's systems. The message can light will illuminate if the computer senses a action is required. be erased and the symbol can be turned off by condition that potentially may need correcting. pressing the READ button (see page 126 for If the warning light remains on, the vehicle When this happens, please have your vehicle information) or this will take place automatically should be driven to a trained and qualified checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- after a short time (the length of time varies, Volvo service technician for inspection, see ice technician as soon as possible. depending on the function affected). page 116 for additional information. A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light The information symbol may also illuminate may have many causes. Sometimes, you may Canadian models are equipped with this together with other symbols. symbol.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

High beam indicator Symbol Description Canadian models are equipped with this This symbol illuminates when the high beam symbol. headlights are on, or if the high beam flash Generator not charging function is used. NOTE Fault in the brake system Left turn signal indicator This symbol also comes on when the 03 mechanical parking brake is only slightly Right turn signal indicator Warning symbol applied.

NOTE Airbags – SRS Low oil pressure • Both turn signal indicators will flash If this light comes on while the vehicle is being when the hazard warning flashers are If the light comes on while driving, stop the driven, or remains on for longer than approxi- used. vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and mately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been check the engine oil level. If the oil level is nor- If either of these indicators flash faster started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions • mal and the light stays on after restart, have the than normal, the direction indicators are have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pre- vehicle towed to the nearest trained and quali- not functioning properly. tensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag, fied Volvo service technician. This is normal, and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s) provided it goes off when the engine speed is inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo Indicator and warning symbols increased. service technician as soon as possible. Symbol Description Parking brake applied Seat belt reminder This symbol illuminates when the parking Low oil pressure This symbol comes on for approximately 6 sec- brake is applied. On models equipped with the onds if the driver has not fastened his or her electric parking brake, this symbol flashes seat belt. Parking brake applied while the brake is being applied and then glows steadily. Generator not charging SRS airbags A flashing symbol means that a fault has been This symbol comes on during driving if a fault detected. See the message in the information has occurred in the electrical system. Contact Seat belt reminder display. an authorized Volvo workshop. Engine temperature Engine overheating can result from low oil or coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high

78 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. • If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- explanatory text is shown on the information Engine overheating will be signaled with text ing. display at the same time. The symbol remains and a red warning triangle in the middle of the • If the symbols remain on, check the level in visible until the fault has been rectified but the instrument display. The exact text will depend the brake fluid reservoir, see page 222. If text message can be cleared with the READ on the degree of overheating. It may range from the brake fluid level is normal but the sym- button, see page 126. The warning symbol can High engine temp Reduce speed to High bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven, also come on in conjunction with other sym- engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate, with great care, to an authorized Volvo bols. 03 workshop to have the brake system other messages, such as Coolant level low, Action: Stop safely will also be displayed. If your checked. engine does overheat so that you must stop the • If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehi- engine, always allow the engine to cool before vehicle should be transported to an author- cle further. attempting to check oil and coolant levels. ized Volvo workshop to have the brake 2. Read the information on the information Fault in brake system system checked. display. Implement the action in accord- If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may ance with the message in the display. Clear be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and WARNING the message using READ. check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark Reminder – doors not closed page 222. If the level in the reservoir is below in the reservoir or if a warning message If one of the doors, the hood or trunk lid is not MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an is displayed in the text window: DO closed properly, the information or warning authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to symbol comes on together with an explanatory system checked. a trained and qualified Volvo service text message in the instrument panel. Stop the technician and have the brake system vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and Canadian models are equipped with this inspected. close the door, hood or trunk. symbol. • If the ABS and Brake system lights are If the vehicle is driven at a speed on at the same time, there is a risk of If the and symbols come on at the lower than approximately 5 mph reduced vehicle stability. same time, there may be a fault in the brake (7 km/h), the information symbol comes on. force distribution system. If the vehicle is driven at a speed 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off Warning symbol higher than approximately 5 mph the engine. The red warning symbol comes on when a fault (7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on. has been indicated which could affect the 2. Restart the engine. safety and/or drivability of the vehicle. An

79 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Trip odometers Clock Analogue clock (S80 Executive only)

03 G029076

Trip odometers and reset button Clock and setting control Analogue clock Odometer display Display Button for setting the clock back. Button for toggling between T1 and T2, Control for setting the clock Burton for setting the clock ahead. and for resetting the odometer Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise The analogue clock is located on the dash- The trip odometers are used to measure short to set the time. The set time is shown in the board, above the glove compartment. distances. A short press the button toggles information display. Use either of the buttons to move the clock's between the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A The clock may be temporarily replaced by a hands back or ahead. This can be done in two long press (more than 2 seconds) resets an symbol in conjunction with a message, see ways: active trip odometer to zero. The distance is page 126. shown in the display. To set the clock 1: 1. Hold down the button. > The hand will move slowly for the first 5 minute time change and then move faster. 2. Release the button when the time shown on the clock is correct.

80 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

To set the clock 2: Press the button quickly. > The hand will move at approximately 10-second intervals.

81 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Inserting and removing the remote key from the slot. The gear selector must be in NOTE position P (Park). The brake pedal must not be depressed Ignition modes when accessing ignition modes I or II. The various ignition modes are accessed with the remote key in the ignition slot. Ignition mode 0 03 Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and Posi- Function press it lightly. It will be drawn into the slot. tion Ignition mode I 0 Odometer, clock and tempera- Press the remote key into the ignition slot ture gauge are illuminated. Steer- and press START/STOP ENGINE. ing lock is deactivated. The audio system can be used. Ignition mode II Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP Press the remote key into the ignition slot ENGINE button. I Moonroof*, power windows,12- and press START/STOP ENGINE for Inserting the remote key volt sockets, navigation system*, approx. 2 seconds. Holding the end of the remote key with the climate system blower, ECC, Ignition mode III (engine start) base of the key blade, insert the remote key windshield wipers can be used. Start the engine, see page 109. into the ignition slot, with the buttons facing up, II The headlights come on. Warn- as shown in the illustration. ing/indicator lights come on for Stopping the engine 5 seconds. All equipment oper- Press START/STOP ENGINE. (If the CAUTION ates apart from heated seats and engine is running and the vehicle is mov- Foreign objects in the ignition slot can rear window defroster, which ing, keep the button depressed until the impair function or damage the lock. only work when the engine is run- engine stops). ning. Return to ignition mode 0 Removing the remote key III The starter motor will operate Press START/STOP ENGINE to return The remote key can be removed from the igni- until the engine has started. from I, II, or III to ignition mode 0. tion slot by pressing the key in lightly. It will then be ejected slightly and can be removed

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Functions with timer The audio system can be operated without a key for 15 minutes at a time by pressing the POWER button. The power windows work for several minutes after the key has been removed, although not after the door has been opened. 03

NOTE Use the POWER button for the audio system when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the battery.

83 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Front seats WARNING Lift the catches (3 in the inset illustration) on the rear of the backrest. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The seat should be adjusted so that the Without releasing the catches, push the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In backrest forward. addition, position the seat as far rear- Move the seat as far forward as possible ward as comfort and control allow. 03 so that the head restraint slides under the • Check that the seat is securely locked glove compartment. into position after adjusting. WARNING Folding the front seat backrest Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops. Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer or softer lumbar support. Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and move the seat to the position of your choice. Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down. Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the angle of the backrest. Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. The front passenger seat backrest can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for Control panel for power seat. a long load. Fold the backrest as follows: Move the seat as far back as possible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

84 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Power seat NOTE Programming the memory Three different seating and door mirror posi- • Only one of the power seat's controls tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory. can be used at the same time. The following example explains how button (1) • The power seats have an overload pro- tector that activates if a seat is blocked can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) can be programmed in the same way. by any object. If this occurs, switch off 03 the ignition (key in position 0) and wait To program (store) a seat position and door for a short period before operating the mirror position in button (1): seat again. 1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the desired position using the seat and mirror Seat with memory function* adjustment controls. 2. Press and hold down the memory button Front edge of seat cushion up/down (4). Seat forward/rearward and up/down 3. With the memory button depressed, press button (1) briefly to store the current posi- Backrest tilt tion for the seat/mirrors. Operation To move the seat and mirrors to the position The seats can be adjusted for a short period that they were in when a button was pro- after unlocking the door with the remote con- grammed: trol without the key in the ignition slot. Seat Press and hold down button (1) until the adjustment is normally made when the ignition seat and mirrors stop moving. is on and can always be made when the engine is running. Stored seat position NOTE Stored seat position As a safety precaution, the seat will stop Stored seat position automatically if the button is released before the seat has reached the preset position. Memory button

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Remote keyless entry system and the NOTE WARNING driver's seat The key memory is independent of the Because the driver's seat can be The remote control transmitter also controls • • seat memory. adjusted with the ignition off, children the position of the power driver's seat in the should never be left unattended in the following way: • The seat will move to this position even if someone else has moved it to a dif- vehicle. 1. Adjust the seat to your preferences. 03 ferent seating position and locked the • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED 2. When you leave your vehicle, lock it using vehicle with a different remote control. at any time by pressing any button on the remote control. • This feature will work in the same way the power seat control panel. with all of the remote control transmit- Do not adjust the seat while driving. The The position of the driver's seat is now stored • ters that you use with your vehicle. seat should be adjusted so that the in the remote control's memory. brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rear- Automatic seat adjustment The function can be activated/deactivated To move the seat to the position in which you ward as comfort and control allow. under Car key memory Seat & mirror left it: The seat rails on the floor must not be positions. For a description of the menu sys- • obstructed in any way when the seat is 1. Unlock the driver's door with the same tem, see the information beginning on page in motion. remote control (the one used to lock the 124. doors) Emergency stop 2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes. Heated/ventilated seats* If the seat accidentally begins to move, press See page 131. The driver's seat will automatically move to the one of the buttons to stop the seat. position in which you left it.

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Rear seats WARNING WARNING Folding down the rear seat backrests • Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked • When the backrest(s) are returned to the and keep keys out of a child’s reach. upright position, check that it is properly Unsupervised children could lock them- locked in place. The red indicators selves in an open trunk and risk injury. should not be visible. Children should be taught not to play in • Return the outboard head restraints to 03 vehicles. the upright position. • On hot days, the temperature in the • Long loads should always be securely trunk or vehicle interior can rise very anchored to help avoid injury in the quickly. Exposure of people to these event of a sudden stop. high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related • Always turn the engine off and apply the injury or death. Small children are par- parking brake when loading/unloading ticularly at risk. the vehicle. • Place the transmission in the Park (P) The rear seat backrests can be folded down position to help prevent inadvertent together, or separately, to make it easier to movement of the gear selector. transport long objects. • On hot days, the temperature in the 1. Pull the release control handle(s). vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high tem- 2. Fold the backrest forward. Adjust the cen- peratures for even a short period of time ter seat head restraint if necessary. can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk. NOTE The outboard head restraints must be folded up (in the upright position) before lowering the backrests.

87 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Rear center head restraint restraint’s left support while pressing the head WARNING restrain down. For safety reasons, no one should be allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi- WARNING tions if the head restraints are folded down. The center rear seat head restraint should If these positions are occupied, the head only be in its lowest position when this seat restraints should be in the upright (fixed) 03 is NOT occupied. When the center position position. is occupied, the head restraint should be correctly adjusted to the passenger’s height. The upper edge of the head restraint NOTE should be at least on a level with the upper- • The head restraint must be returned to most point of the seat occupant's ear. the upright position manually. G021136 • The outboard head restraints cannot be Automatically lowering the rear seat’s folded down on models that are not outboard head restraints equipped with this button.

1. The ignition must be in mode I or II. Pull the head restraint up as required. To lower, press the button at the base of the head 2. Press the button to lower the rear head restraints for improved visibility.

88 03 Your driving environment

SeatsಥS80 Executive

Front seats Massage Lumbar support

03 G030132 G030227 G030131

Button for activating the massage function Button for adjusting lumbar support Button for moving the passenger's seat forward/rearward Firm massage The lumbar support uses the same air cushions as the massage function. The button can be Button for massage and lumbar support Gentle massage used to adjust the amount of support in four Each front seat has a massage function in its directions, as shown in the illustration. backrest. The massage action is done with air Lumbar support can be only be adjusted when cushions, which can be adjusted to a firm or the massage function is switched off. gentle setting. When the setting has been made, the massaging action is carried out in A memory function stores the lumbar support cycles as follows: massage 6 minutes – pause setting and this support will resume after the 4 minutes – massage 6 minutes, etc. massage function has been switched off or after the vehicle has been parked for an When the button is in the center position or if extended period of time. the ignition is in mode 0, the massage function is switched off.

89 03 Your driving environment

SeatsಥS80 Executive

Moving the passenger's seat

03 G030137

The front passenger's seat can be moved forward/rearward from the driver's seat or the rear seat. Press the front section of the button to move the seat forward or the rear section of the button to move the seat rearward. This button does not affect the backrest tilt.

90 03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Adjusting WARNING Horn Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

With the optional speed-dependent power steering the level of steering force can be 03 adjusted, see page 160.

Keypads G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel Horn Lever for releasing/locking the steering Press the steering wheel hub to sound the wheel horn. Possible positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach: 1. Pull the lever toward you to release the steering wheel. Keypads in the steering wheel 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position Cruise control, see page 161. Adaptive that suits you. cruise control*, see page 169. 3. Push back the lever to lock the steering Audio controls, see page 135. wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to push into place, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Lighting panel The intensity of the instrument lighting is Low beams adjusted with the thumb wheel. When the engine is started, the low beams are activated automatically (daytime running lights) High/low beam headlights if the headlight control is in position 0 or .

03 Daytime running lights can be deactivated by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

NOTE The use of daytime running lights is G022854 1 • 2 mandatory in Canada. Overview, light switches • Continuous high beams cannot be acti- Thumb wheel1 for adjusting display and vated when the headlight switch is in G022855 instrument lighting position or 0. High beam flash will Rear fog light Headlight switch and lever function in these positions. Front fog lights Daytime running lights/no high High beam flash beams Headlights/parking lights Move the lever toward the steering wheel Parking lights to position . The high beams come on Instrument lighting until the lever is released. Illumination of the display and instrument lights will vary, depending on ignition mode. Low beams High/low beam headlights The display lighting is automatically subdued Continuous high beams in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the 1. Set the ignition to mode II. thumb wheel.

1 On the S80 Executive, the thumb wheel also adjusts the lighting level in the door handles, storage compartments in the doors, the analogue clock, the cup holders between the front seats and the front footwell lighting.

92 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

2. With the light switch in position , pull ABL is activated automatically when the engine Parking lights the turn signal lever toward the steering is started and it can be deactivated/reactivated wheel to position to toggle between in the menu system under Car settings high and low beams (this also applies on Light settings Active bi xenon lights. models equipped with the optional Active Bending Lights). NOTE 03 > The symbol illuminates in the This function is only active in twilight or dark instrument panel to indicate that the conditions, and only when the vehicle is in high beams are on. motion.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)* If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol will illuminate and a message will be displayed G022907 as shown in the table. Headlight control in position for parking lights The front and rear parking lights can be turned Symbol Display Explana- on even when the ignition is switched off. tion Turn the headlight control to the center posi- Headlamp The system tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the failure is not func- same time). tioning Service The lighting also comes on when the trunk is properly and required opened in order to alert anyone traveling should be behind your vehicle. inspected/ Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light repaired by function deactivated (left) and activated (right) a trained When this function is activated, the headlight and qualified beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve Volvo serv- according to movements of the steering wheel ice techni- (see the right-pointing beam in the illustration). cian.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Front fog lights Rear fog light NOTE The rear fog light is considerably brighter than the normal tail lights and should be used only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft. 03 (150 meters).

Hazard warning flashers G014402 G014403

Button for front fog lights Button for rear fog light The front fog lights can be switched on The single rear fog light is located in the driver's together with high/low beams or the parking side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only lights. However, the fog lights switch off and function in combination with the high/low remain off while the high beams are on. beam headlights or the optional front fog lights. Press the button to switch the fog lights on/ Press the button to switch the rear fog light off. The light in the button comes on when on/off. the fog lights are on. > The rear fog light indicator symbol on the instrument panel and the Location of the hazard warning flasher button NOTE light in the button come on when the The hazard warning flasher should be used to Regulations regarding the use of the front rear fog light is switched on. indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic fog lights may vary, depending on where hazard. you drive. To activate the flashers, press the button in the center dash. Press the button again to turn off the flashers.

94 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

NOTE When turning Interior lighting, front Move the lever as far up or down as possi- • Regulations regarding the use of the hazard warning flasher may vary, ble to start the turn signals. The turn signals will depending on where you live. be cancelled automatically by the movement of the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned • The hazard warning flashers will be acti- to its initial position by hand. vated automatically if an airbag 03 deploys. NOTE • This automatic flashing sequence can Turn signals be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction. • If the turn signal indicator flashes faster G021149 than normal, check for a burned-out Light switches, front roof lighting turn signal bulb. Drivers side front reading light, on/off Passenger's side front reading light, on/off Overhead courtesy lighting. The lighting in the front part of the passenger compartment is controlled with the buttons (1) and (2) in the roof console.

Turn signals Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger compartment lighting: When changing lanes • Off – right side depressed, automatic light- The driver can automatically flash the turn ing off. signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever Neutral position. up or down to the first position and releasing it. • • On – left side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.

95 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Interior lighting, rear The lights are switched on or off by pressing The passenger compartment lighting can be each respective button. switched on and off manually within 30 minutes after the vehicle has been unlocked. Courtesy lights/door step lighting* The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch If the lighting is switched on manually and the on/off automatically when one of the front vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will doors is opened/closed. switch off automatically after one minute. 03 Glove compartment lighting Home safe lighting The glove compartment lighting switches on/ When you leave your vehicle at night, you can off automatically when the lid is opened/ make use of the home safe lighting function to closed. illuminate the area in front of the vehicle. G021150 Overhead courtesy lighting 1. Remove the key from the ignition slot. Rear reading lights The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically when button 2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far as (3) is in the neutral position. possible towards the steering wheel and release it. The lighting comes on and remains on for 30 seconds if: 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. • the vehicle is unlocked from the outside The headlights, parking lights, turn signals, with the key or remote control lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights, and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain the engine is switched off and the ignition • on for 30 2, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval is in mode 0. can be set under Car settings Light The lighting switches off when: settings Home safe light duration • the engine is started Car settings. For a description of the menu the vehicle is locked from the outside. system, see page 124. Rear reading lights (models with the optional lami- • nated panoramic roof) The lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open.

2 Factory setting

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Approach lighting Approach lighting is activated by pressing the approach light button on the remote key (see the illustration on page 56). When the function has been activated, the parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror 03 lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and door step lighting come on. The time interval for this lighting can be set under Car settings Light settings Approach light duration. For a description of the menu system, see page 124.

97 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

Windshield wipers/washers Windshield wipers off NOTE Move the lever to position 0 to switch off the windshield wipers. The wipers will make an extra sweep each time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward. Single sweep Move the lever upward from position When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol 03 0 to sweep the windshield one stroke will illuminate in the instrument panel. at a time for as long as the lever is held up. Activating and setting the sensitivity Intermittent wiping When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle With the lever in this position, you can must be running or in ignition mode II and the set the wiper interval by twisting the windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed in the single sweep position. or downward to decrease the speed. Windshield wipers and washers Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button Rain sensor* on/off Continuous wiping . The windshield wipers will make one The wipers operate at normal speed. sweep. Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency Press the lever up for the wipers to make an The wipers operate at high speed. extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active CAUTION mode when the stalk is released back to posi- Use ample washer fluid when washing tion 0. • Rain sensor* the windshield. The windshield should The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper Deactivating be thoroughly wet when the wipers are Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but- in operation. speed according to the amount of water on the windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor ton or press the lever down to another Before using the wipers, ice and snow • can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up wiper position. should be removed from the wind- (the wipers will sweep the windshield more fre- shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper quently) or down (the wipers will sweep the The rain sensor is automatically deactivated blades are not frozen in place. windshield less frequently). when the key is removed from the ignition slot or five minutes after the ignition has been switched off.

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

CAUTION High-pressure headlight washing* IR-reflecting windshield* High-pressure headlight washing consumes a The rain sensor should be deactivated when large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the washing the car in an automatic car wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the headlights are washed using two alternatives: wipers will start inadvertently in the car • Low/high beam headlights on. The head- wash and could be damaged. lights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the head- 03 Windshield washing lights will only be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed within a 10-minute period. • Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend- ing Lights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Nor- mal halogen headlights will not be washed. Section of the windshield where the IR-coating is not applied CAUTION An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coa- Use ample washer fluid when washing the ting can be applied to the windshield to help windshield. The windshield should be thor- protect the cabin from the sun's heat and the oughly wet when the wipers are in opera- fading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels, tion. etc. Washing function Electronic equipment such as garage door Move the lever toward the steering wheel to openers, electronic toll tags and similar devi- start the windshield and headlight washers. ces should not be placed on sections of the After the lever is released the wipers make sev- windshield with the IR coating because this eral extra sweeps. could affect their function and limit their range. Heated washer nozzles* For best performance, place the device on the The washer nozzles are heated automatically section of the windshield without the IR coating in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid (see the area marked in the illustration). from freezing.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99 03 Your driving environment

Power windows

Power windows Operating NOTE • Movement of the windows will stop if they are obstructed in any way. • To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear windows are opened, also open the 03 front windows slightly.

Manual up/down Move one of the controls up/down slightly. > The power windows move up/down as G018517

G018516 long as the control is held in position.

Driver's door control panel Operating the power windows Auto up/down Move one of the controls up/down as far Manual up/down Switch for power child safety locks* and as possible and release it. disengaging rear power window buttons, Auto up/down. see page 50 > The window will open or close completely. Rear window controls All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver's door. The control Resetting Front window controls. panels in the other doors only operate the win- If the battery has been disconnected, the auto dow in the respective doors. open function must be reset so that it will work WARNING For the power windows to function, the ignition properly. must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle • Always remove the ignition key when 1. Gently raise the front section of the button the vehicle is unattended. has been running, the power windows can be to close the window and hold it for one operated for several minutes after the remote second. • Never leave children unattended in the key has been removed from the ignition slot, or vehicle. until a door has been opened. 2. Release the button briefly. • Make sure that the windows are com- 3. Raise the front section of the button again pletely unobstructed before they are for one second. operated.

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Power windows

Laminated glass* The window can be opened and closed, even This glass is reinforced to help pro- if the sun shade is in use. vide protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. The windshield, optional monroof and other windows have laminated glass. 03

Sun shade*

Hook and lock tab The sun shade is integrated into the panels on both rear doors. 1. Pull up the sun shade and hook it into the upper edge of the door frame. 2. Lock the sun shade in place by pulling lock tab upward.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

Power door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* To acitvate this function, select reverse gear The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt in narrow spaces: the mirror down. 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the The door mirror will reset to its normal position: same time. • after 10 seconds when reverse is disen- 03 2. Release them after approximately one sec- gaged and the car remains stopped. ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the • immediately when reverse is disengaged fully retracted position. and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors • immediately if you press the correspond- automatically stop in the fully extended posi- ing L or R button again. G018518 tion. • when the engine is turned off. Door mirror controls Storing the position* • when the side mirrors are folded in. Adjusting The mirror positions are stored in the key mem- 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror ory when the vehicle has been locked with the NOTE or the R button for the right door mirror. remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time. The light in the button comes on. the same remote control the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the Automatic retraction when locking the driver's door is opened. center. When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the 3. Press the L or R button again. The light The function can be activated/deactivated remote key the door mirrors are automatically should no longer be on. under Car key memory Seat & mirror retracted/extended. positions. For a description of the menu sys- The function can be activated/deactivated tem, see page 124. WARNING under Car settings Fold mirr. when Objects seen in the mirrors may appear fur- Tilting the door mirror when parking* locking. For a description of the menu system, ther away than they actually are. The door mirrors can be tilted down to help see page 124. give the driver a better view along the sides of Resetting to neutral the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be electrically reset

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors to the neutral position for electric retracting/ Press the button once to start simultaneous extending to work. rear window and door mirror defrosting. The light in the button indicates that the function is • Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons. active. Defrosting is deactivated automatically and its duration is controlled by the outside • Fold them out again with the L and R but- temperature. tons. The rear window is defogged/de-iced auto- 03 The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. matically if the vehicle is started in an outside Home safe and approach lighting temperature lower than 45 °F (7 °C). The light on the door mirrors comes on when Defrosting can be selected under Climate approach lighting or home safe lighting is settings Auto rear defroster. Select selected, see page 96. between On or Off.

Rear window and door mirror Interior rearview mirror defrosters Auto-dim function An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from following traffic and automatically reduces glare in the mirror.

Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice from the rear window and the door mirrors.

103 03 Your driving environment

Power moonroof

Introduction Sliding moonroof Manual closing The moonroof controls are located in the ceil- Push the switch forward to the first stop ing console near the rearview mirror. The (the position for manual closing) and hold moonroof can be opened vertically and hori- it until the moonroof has closed to the posi- zontally. The vehicle's must be in ignition mode tion of your choice, or has closed com- I or II for the moonroof to be operated. pletely. 03 Automatic closing CAUTION Push the switch as far forward as possible • Remove ice and snow before opening (the position for automatic closing) and the moonroof. release it to automatically close the moonroof. • Do not operate the moonroof if it is frozen closed. G021343 WARNING • Never place heavy objects on the Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward moonroof. Opening, automatic • During manual closing, if the moonroof is obstructed, immediately open it Opening, manual again. Closing, manual • Never open or close the moonroof if it is obstructed in any way. Closing, automatic • Never allow a child to operate the moonroof. Automatic opening Pull the switch as far back as possible (to • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. the position for automatic opening) and • Never extend any object or body part release it to automatically fully slide open though the open moonroof, even if the the moonroof. vehicle's ignition is completely switched off. Manual opening Pull the switch back to the first stop (the position for manual opening) and hold it until the moonroof has opened to the position of your choice.

104 03 Your driving environment

Power moonroof

Tilt position

03 G028899

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge Open by pressing the rear edge of the control upward. Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward and hold it until the moonroof has closed completely.

Visor The moonroof features a sliding visor. The visor slides open automatically when the moonroof is opened, and must be closed manually.

105 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Introduction WARNING Programming HomeLink

• If you use HomeLink to open a garage NOTE door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. Some vehicles may require the ignition When programming a garage door switch to be turned on or to the second • (“accessories”) position for programming 03 opener, it is advised to park outside of and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec- the garage. ommended that a new battery be placed in • Do not use HomeLink with any garage the hand-held transmitter of the device door opener that lacks safety stop and being programmed to HomeLink for quicker reverse features as required by U.S. training and accurate transmission of the federal safety standards (this includes radio-frequency signal. any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage 1. Position the end of your hand-held trans- The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro- door that cannot detect an object - sig- mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the vides a convenient way to replace up to three naling the door to stop and reverse - HomeLink button you wish to program hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters does not meet current U.S. federal while keeping the indicator light in view. used to activate devices such as gate opera- safety standards. For more information, 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, contact HomeLink at: chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit- security systems, even home lighting. Addi- www.homelink.com. ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator tional HomeLink information can be found on light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink- the Internet at www.homelink.com. Retain the original transmitter of the RF device ing light. Now you may release both the you are programming for use in other vehicles HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but- as well as for future HomeLink programming. It tons. is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink Buttons”.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE found where the hanging antenna wire is cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink” attached to the motor-head unit. step 2 with the following: Some devices may require you to replace this Programming Step 2 with procedures 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- “smart” button. (The name and color of the button while you press and release - gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica- button may vary by manufacturer.) There every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand- tor light does not change to a rapidly blink- are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. held transmitter until the HomeLink indica- ing light after performing these steps, con- tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly 03 tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold blinking light. Now you may release both for two seconds and release the pro- the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and buttons. “press/hold/release” sequence a second release the programmed HomeLink but- Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com- time, and, depending on the brand of the ton up to two separate times to activate the plete. garage door opener (or other rolling code door. If the door does not activate, press equipped device), repeat this sequence a and hold the just-trained HomeLink button third time to complete the programming Using HomeLink and observe the indicator light. process. To operate, simply press and release the pro- • If the indicator light stays on con- HomeLink should now activate your rolling grammed HomeLink button. Activation will stantly, programming is complete code equipped device. now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage and your device should activate when door opener, gate operator, security system, the HomeLink button is pressed and Gate Operator/Canadian Programming entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For released. Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the • If the indicator light blinks rapidly for mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- device may also be used at any time. In the two seconds and then turns to a con- eral seconds of transmission – which may not event that there are still programming difficul- stant light continue with “Program- be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the ties or questions, contact HomeLink at: ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro- signal during programming. Similar to this www.homelink.com. gramming of a rolling code equipped Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are device (most commonly a garage door designed to “time-out” in the same manner. opener). If you live in Canada or you are having difficul- 4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor- ties programming a gate operator or garage head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” door opener by using the “Programming” pro- or “smart” button. This can usually be

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Erasing HomeLink Buttons For questions or comments, contact HomeLink To erase programming from the three Home- at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. Link buttons (individual buttons cannot be This device complies with FCC rules part 15 erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation below), follow the step noted: is subject to the following two conditions: (1) 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink This device may not cause harmful interfer- 03 buttons until the indicator light begins to ence, and (2) This device must accept any flash-after 10 seconds. interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired opera- 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for tion. longer that 20 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode NOTE and can be programmed at any time beginning The transmitter has been tested and com- with “Programming” - step 1. plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Reprogramming a Single HomeLink the party responsible for compliance could Button void the user’s authority to operate the device.2 To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home- Link button, proceed with “Programming” - step 1.

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Start 3

03 G033764

1. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot 3. Depress the brake pedal2. Press and with the buttons upward and the metallic release the START/STOP ENGINE button. key blade pointing outward (not inserted The autostart function will operate the into the slot)1. starter motor until the engine starts. Ignition switch with remote key inserted (see page 82 for more information on ignition modes) The starter motor operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not WARNING started, repeat the procedure. Before starting the engine: NOTE • Fasten the seat belt. Keyless drive* • Check that the seat, steering wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless G033763 drive feature, one of the remote keys must • Make sure the brake pedal can be be in the passenger compartment. Follow depressed completely. Adjust the seat 2. Push lightly on the remote key. It will be the instructions in step 3 to start the vehicle. if necessary. automatically drawn into the ignition slot in the correct position.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment. 2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

WARNING WARNING NOTE An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause • Always remove the remote key from the • After a cold start, idle speed may be the accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch. ignition slot when leaving the vehicle, noticeably higher than normal for a Check that the movement of these pedals is especially if there are children in the short period. This is done to help bring not impeded. Not more than one protective vehicle. components in the emission control floor covering may be used at one time. system to their normal operating tem- 03 • Never remove the remote key from the ignition slot while driving or when the perature as quickly as possible, which vehicle is being towed. The steering enables them to control emissions and lock could otherwise be activated, mak- help reduce the vehicle's impact on the 3 ing it impossible to steer the vehicle. On environment . vehicles with the optional keyless drive, • Keylock: Your vehicle is equipped with never remove the remote key from the a keylock system. When the engine is vehicle while driving or during towing. switched off, the gear selector must be • Always place the gear selector in Park in the Park position before the key can and apply the parking brake before be removed4 from the ignition slot. leaving the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. • Always open garage doors fully before starting the engine inside a garage to ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous.

3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature. 4 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

110 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

CAUTION Switching off the engine To jump start your vehicle: With the engine running, press the START/ When starting in cold weather, the auto- 1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to • STOP ENGINE button. matic transmission may shift up at mode 0, see page 82). slightly higher engine speeds than nor- If the gear selector is not in the P position or if 2. First connect the red jumper cable to the mal until the automatic transmission the vehicle is moving, press the button twice or auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal . fluid reaches normal operating tem- press and hold it in until the engine switches 03 perature. off. 3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) • Do not race a cold engine immediately terminal on your vehicle's battery , after starting. Oil flow may not reach Jump starting marked with a "+" sign, located under a some lubrication points fast enough to folding cover. prevent engine damage. 4. Connect the black jumper cable to the aux- • The engine should be idling when you iliary battery's negative (–) terminal and move the gear selector. Never acceler- to the ground point in your vehicle's engine ate until after you feel the transmission compartment (right engine mount at the engage. Accelerating immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh top, on the outer screw) . engagement and premature transmis- 5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, sion wear. then start the engine in the vehicle with • Selecting P or N when idling at a stand- dead battery. still for prolonged periods of time will 6. After the engine has started, first remove help prevent overheating of the auto- G021347 matic transmission fluid. the negative (–) terminal jumper cable Connecting the jumper cables (black). Then remove the positive (+) termi- Follow these instructions to jump start your nal jumper cable (red). vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touching to prevent premature completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle.

111 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

WARNING WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! • Do not connect the jumper cable to any Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- part of the fuel system or to any moving sories contain lead and lead compounds, parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. chemicals known to the state of California • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which to cause cancer and reproductive harm. is flammable and explosive. 03 Wash hands after handling. • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, CAUTION skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area Connect the jumper cables carefully to immediately with water. Obtain medical avoid short circuits with other components help immediately if eyes are affected. in the engine compartment. • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark. • Do not smoke near the battery. • Failure to follow the instructions for jump starting can lead to injury.

112 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Automatic transmission Shiftlock Reverse (R) When P has been selected, the transmission is The vehicle must be stationary when position mechanically blocked in this position. The R is selected. brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least mode II (see page 82) Neutral position (N) before the gear lever can be moved from the No gear is engaged and the engine can be P position. started with the gear selector in this position. 03 Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta- Always apply the parking brake when the vehi- tionary with the gear selector in position N. cle is parked. Press the control to apply the brake, see page 118. Drive (D) D is the normal driving position. The car auto-

G021351 matically shifts between the various forward gears, based on the level of acceleration and 1 Shiftgate positions speed. The car must be at a standstill when Depress the button on the front of the gear shifting from position R to position D. selector knob to move the gear selector between the R, N, D, and P positions. Geartronic–manual shifting Geartronic allows you to manually shift among The gear selector can be moved freely between your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D) can be selected at any time. positions while driving. • To access the manual shifting position Park position (P) G021350 from Drive (D), move the gear selector to Select the P position when starting or parking. the right (to the area marked M in the illustration or to S on models equipped with Keylock CAUTION Sport mode). To remove the remote key from the ignition The vehicle must be stationary when posi- slot, the gear selector must be in the P position. tion P is selected. The remote key is locked in the slot in all other positions.

1 The information display (see page 75) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

113 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

NOTE Shiftlock – Neutral (N) Shiftlock override If the gear selector is in the N position and the On models equipped with Sport mode, the vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 sec- transmission will not switch to manual shifting mode until the gear selector is moved onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run- forward or rearward. The selected gear will ning) then the gear selector is locked. then be shown in the information display To be able to move the gear selector from N to 03 (see page 75). another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in posi- • To return to the D position from the manual tion II, see page 82. shifting position or Sport mode, move the Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces gear selector to the left. Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shift- While driving ing mode can help provide better traction when • If you select the manual shifting position starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so: while driving, the gear that was being used If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example in the Drive position will also initially be 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the because of a dead battery, the gear selector selected in the manual shifting position. gear selector to the right from the D posi- must be moved from the P position before the tion to the manual shifting position. The Move the gear selector forward (toward vehicle can be moved2. • text in the instrument panel display will "+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the (toward "–") to shift to a lower gear. change from D to 1. storage compartment behind the center • If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the 2. Press the gear selector forward and console to expose the small opening for transmission will downshift one gear at a release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the overriding the shiftlock system. time and will utilize the braking power of selector forward again and release it to the engine. If the current speed is too high select 3rd gear. Insert the key blade into the opening. Press for using a lower gear, the downshift will the key blade down as far as possible and 3. Release the brake pedal and press gently not occur until the speed has decreased keep it held down. Move the gear selector on the accelerator pedal. enough to allow the lower gear to be used. from the P position. For information on the • If you slow to a very low speed, the trans- key blade, see page 59. mission will automatically shift down.

2 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 111.

114 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Please be aware that overriding the shiftlock NOTE system does not release the steering wheel lock. The message AWD disabled Service required will be appear in the information All Wheel Drive – AWD3 display if an electrical fault should occur in the AWD system. A warning light will also illuminate in the instrument panel. If this occurs, have the system checked by a 03 trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent All Wheel Drive, which means that power is distributed automatically between the front and rear wheels. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to the front wheels. However, if there is any tendency for the front wheels to spin, an electron- ically controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have the best traction.

3 Standard on certain models.

115 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

Brake system Brake lights ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is The brake system is a hydraulic system con- The brake lights come on automatically when switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob- the brakes are applied. brake pedal feels harder than usual. lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is Adaptive brake lights Water on brake discs and brake pads still possible to stop the vehicle with the other The adaptive brake lights activate in the event affects braking brake circuit. of sudden braking or if the ABS system is acti- 03 Driving in rain and slush or passing through an If the brake pedal must be depressed farther vated. This function causes an additional tail- automatic car wash can cause water to collect than normal and requires greater foot pressure, light on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a the stopping distance will be longer. help alert vehicles traveling behind. delay in braking effect when the pedal is A warning light in the instrument panel will light The adaptive brake lights activate if: depressed. To avoid such a delay when the up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred. brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa- • The ABS system activates for more than sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. If this light comes on while driving or braking, approximately a half second This will remove the water from the brakes. stop immediately and check the brake fluid • In the event of sudden braking while the Check that brake application feels normal. This level in the reservoir. vehicle is moving at speeds above approx- should also be done after washing or starting imately 6 mph (10 km/h) in very damp or cold weather. NOTE When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake Severe strain on the brake system Press the brake pedal hard and maintain lights and additional taillights remain on for as The brakes will be subject to severe strain pressure on the pedal – do not pump the long as the brake pedal is depressed or until brakes. braking force on the vehicle is reduced. when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually Power brakes function only when the slower, which means that the cooling of the WARNING engine is running brakes is less efficient than when driving on If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes, reservoir or if a brake system message is which is only created when the engine is run- shift into a lower gear and let the engine help shown in the information display: DO NOT ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the with the braking. Do not forget that if you are DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained engine switched off. towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to and qualified Volvo service technician and a greater than normal load. have the brake system inspected. If the power brakes are not working, considerably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal to compensate for the lack of power assistance. This can happen for exam-

116 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

Anti-lock braking system ing. The system is activated by the speed with Symbols in the instrument panel which the brake pedal is depressed. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to Symbol Specification improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) When the EBA system is activated, the brake during severe braking conditions by limiting pedal will go down and pressure in the brake Steady glow – Check the brake brake lockup. When the system "senses" system immediately increases to the maximum fluid level. If the level is low, fill impending lockup, braking pressure is auto- level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal with brake fluid and check for matically modulated in order to help prevent in order to utilize the system completely. EBA the cause of the brake fluid 03 lockup that could lead to a skid. is automatically deactivated when the brake loss. pedal is released. The system performs a brief self-diagnostic Steady glow for two seconds test when the engine has been started and when the engine is started – driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- NOTE There was a fault in the brake matic test may be performed when the vehicle When the EBA system is activated, the system's ABS function when first reaches a speed of approximately 25 mph • brake pedal will go down and pressure the engine was last running. (40 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several in the brake system immediately increa- times and a sound may be audible from the ses to the maximum level. You must WARNING ABS control module. This is normal. maintain full pressure on the brake Cleaning the brake discs pedal in order to utilize the system com- If and come on at the same time pletely. There will be no braking effect if Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs and the brake level is below the MIN mark the pedal is released. EBA is automati- in the reservoir or if a brake system-related may result in delayed brake function. This delay cally deactivated when the brake pedal message is shown in the information dis- is minimized by cleaning the brake linings. is released. play: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv- Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet • When the vehicle has been parked for weather, prior to long-term parking, and after ice technician and have the brake system some time, the brake pedal may sink inspected. the vehicle has been washed. Do this by brak- more than usual when the engine is ing gently for a short period while the vehicle is started. This is normal and the pedal will moving. return to its usual position when it is released. Emergency Brake Assistance EBA is designed to provide full brake effect immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-

117 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Electric parking brake Applying the electric parking brake NOTE An electric parking brake has the same func- In an emergency the parking brake can tion as a manual parking brake. • be applied when the vehicle is moving by holding in the control. Braking will be NOTE interrupted when the accelerator pedal is depressed or the control is released. 03 • A faint sound from the parking brake's electric motor can be heard when the • An audible signal will sound during this parking brake is being applied. This procedure if the vehicle is moving at sound can also be heard during the speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). automatic function check of the parking brake. Parking on a hill • The brake pedal will move slightly when G021354 • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front the electric parking brake is applied or Parking brake control wheels so that they point away from the released. curb. 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the Low battery voltage 2. Push the control. front wheels so that they point toward the If the battery voltage is too low, the parking 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that curb. brake cannot be applied or released. Connect the vehicle is at a standstill. an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too 4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selec- low, see page 111. tor must be in position P. The symbol in the instrument panel flashes while the parking bake is being applied, and glows steadily when the parking brake has been fully applied.

118 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Releasing the electric parking brake NOTE Symbols • For safety reasons, the parking brake is Symbol Specification only released automatically if the engine Read the message in the infor- is running and the driver is wearing a seat mation display belt. • The electric parking brake will be A flashing symbol indicates that 03 released immediately when the acceler- the parking brake is being ator pedal is pressed and the gear selec- applied. If the symbol flashes in tor is in position D or P. any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. 2. Fasten the seat belt Read the message on the infor- G021359 mation display. 3. Move the gear selector to position D or R Parking brake control and press the accelerator pedal. The park- Messages Manual release ing brake will release when the vehicle 1. Fasten the seat belt. begins to move. 2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. vehicle to roll backward when the parking 4. Pull the parking brake control. brake is released automatically on a steep Vehicles with Keyless drive* incline. To help avoid this: 1. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button. 1. Keep the electric parking brake lever 2. Press firmly on the brake pedal. pushed in with the left hand while shifting into Drive with the right. 3. Pull the parking brake control. 2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull G016556 Automatic release away, release the parking brake lever only 1. Start the engine. after the vehicle begins to move. Park brake not fully released – A fault is pre- venting the parking brake from being released. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds. Parking brake not applied – A fault is pre- venting the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the message remains. 03 Parking brake Service required – A fault has occurred. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains.

WARNING If the vehicle must be parked before the fault has been corrected, always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so that they point away from the curb if the vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is pointing downhill.

120 03 Your driving environment

121 122 *

Option/accessory, for more information, seeIntroduction. Bluetooth Audio system Climate system Menus andmessages asne oprmn ovnec–8 xctv ...... 194 Passenger compartmentconvenience–S80 Executive...... Passenger compartmentconvenience Blind SpotInformation Park assist* Driver AlertSystem* 176 Distance alert*...... 169 Adaptive CruiseControl(ACC)*...... Collision warningwith 161 Cruise control...... Active chassissystem–Four 158 Stability system...... 157 Compass...... 155 Trip computer...... ® hands-freeconnection...... 184 ...... 135 ...... 128 ...... 179 ...... 124 ...... Auto-brake*...... ytm...... 187 System*...... 160 C...... 191 ...... 149 ...... 163

G020908 COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE 04 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Center console Steering wheel keypad 1. Press MENU. Certain functions are controlled from the center 2. Scroll to the desired menu and press console via the menu system or from the key- ENTER. pad in the steering wheel. Each function is described under its respective section. 3. Scroll to the desired submenu and press ENTER. The current menu level is shown at the top right of display in the center console. The navigation button can be used instead of ENTER and EXIT when navigating the menu Center console controls hierarchy. The right arrow is equal to ENTER and the left arrow to EXIT. 04 The menu options are numbered and can also be selected directly with the numerical keypad (1–9 only). ENTER Menu overview EXIT Navigation buttons. NOTE Buttons (1-3) on the steering wheel keypad Menu selections will not be available (will be have the same function as those in the center "grayed out") when the vehicle is moving. console. Center console with information display and con- Car key memory trols for menus Search paths Access to some functions is provided directly Seat & mirror positions Navigation button – scrolls and selects via the function buttons and others are Car settings among menu options accessed through the menu system. ENTER – selects menu options Collision warning settings* Search paths to the menu system functions are MENU – accesses the menu system listed as follows: Car settings Lock Light settings settings, if the following steps have been taken Lock settings EXIT – leads back one step in the menu first: structure. A long press exits the menu sys- Reduced guard1 tem.

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Tire pressure Main menu FM Main menu USB Door mirror settings HD radio USB settings Parking camera settings (accessory) FM settings Audio settings Lane departure warning* Radio text Track information* Advanced radio settings Steering force level* Main iPod menu Information Audio settings iPod settings

Climate settings Main menu CD Audio settings Automatic blower adjust Random Track information* 04 Recirculation timer Off Main Bluetooth menu Auto. rear defroster Folder Last 10 missed calls Reset climate settings Disc Last 10 received calls Single disc Main menu AM Last 10 dialled calls HD radio All discs Phone book Audio settings2 CD settings Search Sound stage Track information* Copy fr. mobile phone Equalizer, front Audio settings Bluetooth*

Equalizer, rear Main menu AUX Connect phone Auto. volume control Volume, AUX input Change phone Resets all audio settings. Audio settings Remove phone

1 Certain models 2 The menu option for audio settings is available in all audio sources.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Phone settings The menus shown on the information displays When a warning, information or indicator sym- in the instrument panel are controlled with the bol comes on, a corresponding message Call options left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition appears on the information display. An error Sounds and volume mode. Press READ to erase a message and message is stored in a memory list until the Synchronize phone book return to the menus. fault is rectified. Menu overview Press READ to acknowledge and scroll among the messages. Main instrument panel Driving distance on current fuel reserve Average NOTE Instantaneous: If a warning message appears while you are 04 Average speed using the trip computer, the message must be read and confirmed by pressing READ Current speed in mph (Canadian models before the previous activity can be only) resumed. DSTC Message Description Message Stop safely Stop and switch off

G022908 the engine. Serious risk of damage. Information display and menu controls Contact an author- READ – access to the list of messages and ized Volvo work- message confirmation. shop. Thumbwheel – browse among menus and options in the list of functions. Stopping the Stop and switch off engine the engine. Serious RESET – reset the active function. Used in risk of damage. certain cases to select/activate a function, Contact an author- see the explanation under each respective ized Volvo work-

function. G028940 shop.

126 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Message Description Message Description Service urgent Have the vehicle Maintenance over- If the service inter- checked by an due vals are not fol- authorized Volvo lowed, the warranty workshop immedi- does not cover any ately. damaged parts. Contact an author- Service required Have the vehicle ized Volvo workshop checked by an for service. authorized Volvo workshop as soon Temporarily OFF A function has been 04 as possible. temporarily switched off and is See manual Read the owner's reset automatically manual. while driving or after Book time for Time to book service starting again. maintenance at an authorized Power save mode The audio system is Volvo retailer. switched off to save Time for regular Time for regular current. Charge the battery. maintenance service at an authorized Volvo workshop. The timing is determined by the number of miles driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time.

127 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Introduction NOTE mercially available window washing spray will also help prevent fogging or misting. Air conditioning The sunlight sensor monitors which side of The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate the car that is most exposed to sunlight. Vents in the parcel shelf Control (ECC). The climate control system This can mean that the temperature may differ between the right and left-side air cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the pas- vents, even if the temperatures set for both NOTE senger compartment. sides of the passenger compartment are the The air vents at the rear of the parcel shelf same. should never be obstructed. NOTE • The air conditioning can be switched • The temperature sensor for the passenger Temporary shut-off of the air compartment is located below the climate 04 off, but to ensure the best possible cli- conditioning control panel. mate comfort in the passenger com- The air conditioning is momentarily disen- partment and to prevent the windows • The outside temperature sensor is located gaged during full-throttle acceleration or when from misting, it should always be on. on the door mirror. driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a • In warm weather, a small amount of • The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- temporary increase in cabin temperature. water may accumulate under the car rior rearview mirror. when it has been parked. This water is Ice and snow condensation from the A/C system and NOTE Always keep the air intake grille at the base of is normal. the windshield free of snow. Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects. Climate system maintenance Sensor location Special tools and equipment are required to The sunlight sensor is located on the top • maintain and carry out repairs on the climate side of the dashboard. Side windows and moonroof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- system. Work of this type should only be done mally, the side windows, and the optional by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- moonroof should be closed. nician.

Fog on the inside of the windows Refrigerant The defroster function should be used to Volvo cares about the environment. The air remove fog or mist from the inside of the win- conditioning system in your car contains a dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com- CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance will not deplete the ozone layer. The air condi-

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system tioning system contains 1.8 lbs (800 g) of NOTE Air distribution R134a. The systems uses PAG oil. Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter Passenger compartment filter replacement intervals. Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at the recommended intervals. Please refer to Menu settings your Warranty and Service Records Informa- The default settings for three of the climate tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified system's functions can be changed in the Volvo service technician for these intervals. menu system, see page 124: The filter should be replaced more often when driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The • Blower speed in automatic mode, see filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should page 131. 04

always be replaced with a new one. • Recirculation timer for passenger com- G021366 partment air, see page 133. NOTE • Automatic rear window defrosting, see The incoming air is distributed from 20 different page 103. vents in the passenger compartment. There are different types of cabin air filters. Ensure that the correct type is installed. The functions can also be returned to factory Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO settings in the menu system. mode. Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) If desired, air distribution can be controlled A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles manually, see page 134. in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels of odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects increased levels of contaminants in the outside air. When the air quality sensor detects contaminated outside air, the air intake closes and the air inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air.

129 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars Electronic climate control, ECC

04 G021367 G021368

Open Open Ventilated front driver's seat* Closed Closed Blower Horizontal airflow Horizontal airflow Heated front driver's seat* Vertical airflow Vertical airflow Air distribution Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- Ventilated front passenger's seat* dows to defrost. dows to defrost. Auto Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature Heated front passenger's seat* in the rear seat. Temperature control, passenger's side A/C – On/Off Heated rear window and door mirrors, see page 103. Defroster (maximum effect)

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Recirculation/Air quality system • Press the button a fourth time to switch off Heated rear seats* the function – the indicator light will go out. Temperature control, driver's side Blower control Ventilated front seats* Turn the control clockwise to The ventilation system consists of fans in the increase or counterclockwise seats and backrests that draw air through the to decrease the blower seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases speed. Pressing the AUTO as the air in the passenger compartment switch will automatically reg- becomes cooler. ulate blower speed and override manual adjustment. The ventilation is controlled by the ECC sys- 04 tem, which takes into account the seat temperature, sunlight in the passenger compart- NOTE G021376 ment, and the ambient temperature. If the blower is turned off completely, the air Heat control for the outboard seating positions The ventilation can be used at the same time conditioning is disengaged, which may result in fogging on the windows. takes place in the same way as for the front as seat heating. seat. The ventilation system can be activated when Heated front seats* Air distribution the engine is running. There are three comfort Press the button once for the The figure consists of three levels that produce different cooling and dehu- highest heat level – three indi- buttons. When the buttons midification effects: cator lights come on. are pressed, an indicator light Level three: press the button once for in front of the respective part • Press the button twice for a maximum output – three indicator lights of the figure illuminates and lower heat level – two indica- come on. shows which air distribution is tor lights come on. • Level two: press the button twice for a selected, see page 134. lower output – two indicator lights come Press the button three times for the lowest heat on. level – one indicator light comes on. • Level one: press the button three times for Press the button four times to switch off the the lowest output – one indicator light heat – no indicator lights come on. comes on.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Auto Temperature control Defroster The function automatically The temperatures on the This function defrosts/de-ices regulates cooling, heating, driver and passenger sides the windshield and front side blower speed, recirculation, can be set independently. windows. The indicator light and air distribution to main- When the vehicle is started, in the defroster button lights tain the chosen temperature. the most recent setting is when the function is active. If you select one or more man- resumed. ual functions, the other func- Blower speed increases automatically and tions continue to be controlled automatically. • NOTE the air conditioning will switch on (if not The air quality sensor is engaged and all man- already on and if the passenger compart- ual settings are switched off when AUTO is Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by 04 ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid- pressed. The display shows AUTO selecting a higher/lower temperature than the actual temperature required. ify the air in the passenger compartment. CLIMATE. Air conditioning can be switched off by pressing the AC button. Blower speed in automatic mode can be set A/C – ON/OFF under Climate settings Automatic fan The air conditioning is con- • Recirculation will not function while defrost adjust. Choose between Low, Normal or trolled automatically by the is engaged. High. system when the ON light is The climate system will return to its previous on. This cools/heats and settings when the defroster function is NOTE dehumidifies the incoming air. switched off. Selecting the lowest blower speed may When the OFF light is on, the increases the risk of fog forming on the win- air conditioning is always dis- dows. engaged. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When defroster is selected, the air conditioning system is set for maximum For a description of the menu system, see blower speed and dehumidification. page 124.

132 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Recirculation/air quality system NOTE • The left orange light comes on – the air quality sensor is disengaged. Recirculation When Defroster is selected, recirculation is This function can be used to always deactivated. • The center green light comes on – recircu- shut out exhaust fumes, lation not engaged, providing it is not smoke, etc from the passen- required for cooling in hot weather. Interior Air Quality System–IAQS* ger compartment. The air in • The right orange light comes on – recircu- This system consists of a mul- the passenger compartment lation is engaged. tifilter and an air quality sen- is then recirculated, i.e., no air sor. The filter helps remove from outside the car is taken NOTE gases and particles from the into the car when this function is activated. The incoming air, thereby reduc- The air quality sensor should always be indicator light in the button will illuminate when • ing the amounts of odors and engaged in order to obtain the best air 04 recirculation is selected. contaminants entering the in the passenger compartment. If the air in the car recirculates for too long, vehicle. The air quality sensor detects • Recirculation is limited in cold weather there is a risk of condensation forming on the increased levels of contaminants in the outside to avoid fogging. insides of the windows, especially in winter. air. When the air quality sensor detects conta- • If the insides of the windows start fog- Timer minated outside air, the air intake closes and ging, disengage the air quality sensor. The timer function minimizes the risk of fog- the air inside the passenger compartment is Use the defroster function to increase ging, or stale air when the recirculation function recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters the vehi- airflow to the front, side, and rear win- is selected by automatically switching off the cle. The filter also cleans recirculated passen- dows. function after a certain length of time, depend- ger compartment air. When the AUTO button ing on the ambient temperature. Activate/ is depressed the air quality sensor is always deactivate the function under Climate engaged. settings Recirculation time. For a Activating the air quality sensor description of the menu system, see Switch between the three page 124. functions by pressing the button repeatedly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air distribution table Air distribution Use Air distribution Use Air to windows. Some air To remove de-fog/de- Air to the floor and windows. To ensure comfortable flows from the dashboard ice the front side win- Some air flows from the conditions and good de- air vents. The air is not dows and windshield dashboard air vents. fogging in cold or humid recirculated. Air condition- quickly. weather. ing is always engaged.

Air to windshield and side In cold or humid Air to floor and from dash- In sunny weather with 04 windows. Some air flows weather (blower board air vents. cool outside tempera- from the air dashboard speed should be tures. vents. moderate to high).

Airflow to windows and To ensure good com- Air to floor. Some air flows to To warm or cool the feet. from dashboard air vents. fort in warm, dry the dashboard air vents and weather. windows.

Airflow to the head and To ensure efficient Airflow to windows, from To cool the feet or pro- chest from the dashboard cooling in warm dashboard air vents and to vide warmer air to the air vents. weather. the floor. upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

134 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Introduction Overview Steering wheel keypad The audio system is available in two versions: High Performance and Premium Sound. The system version is shown in the display when the audio system is switched on. If the audio system is on when the ignition is switched off, it will come on automatically the next time the ignition is put in mode I or higher. The audio system can be operated without a key in the ignition slot for 15 minutes at a time by pressing the POWER button (the driver's 04 door must be closed on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). Socket for external audio source (AUX, Confirm selection in menu system and Some functions are controlled from the menu USB, iPod 1)* controls for a bluetooth-connected cell system in the center console. For more infor- phone. mation on menus, see page 124. Steering wheel keypad Go higher in the menu system. Interrupt Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the sym- Center console control panel current function. bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Control panel with headphones socket* Volume Licensing Corporation. The Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured under A short press scrolls between CD tracks or license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor- preset radio stations. A long press poration. searches within CD tracks or searches for radio stations automatically. Please note that these functions are also available through the audio system controls on center console.

1 iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Audio functions of the vehicle. The level of sound compensa- • Fader – Balance between the front and tion can be set at low, medium or high. Select rear speakers. the level under Audio settings Auto • Balance – Balance between the right and volume control. left speakers. * – Level for the bass speaker. External audio source audio volume • Subwoofer The subwoofer can be switched off by External devices such as an MP3 player can be turning control (3) counterclockwise to connected to the AUX input, see page 135. The Min. volume of the external sound source AUX may be different from the volume of the internal • Surround* – Surround settings. sound sources such as the CD player or the Under Surround, 3 channel stereo or Dolby 04 radio. If the external sound source's volume is Surround Pro logic II can be activated by too high, the quality of the sound may be selecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This ena- Center console, controls for audio functions impaired. To help prevent this, adjust the input bles the following options: volume of the external audio source: Internal audio sources: AM, FM and CD • Center level2 – Level for the center 1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using speaker. External audio source. For connection, see MODE and use (4) to navigate to AUX 2 page 135 • Surround level – Level for surround input volume. sound. Push button and knob controls for making 2. Turn the control (3) or press / the nav- sound settings Equalizer igation button. Sound levels for different frequencies can be Navigation button adjusted separately using the equalizer3. Sound settings Volume and on/off Press the control (3) repeatedly to toggle 1. Go to Audio settings and select among the sound settings. Adjustments are Equalizer front or Equalizer rear. Audio volume and automatic volume made by turning the control (3). control The sound level for the frequency is The audio system compensates for disrupting • Bass – Bass level. adjusted with / on the navigation but- noises in the passenger compartment by • Treble – Treble level. ton. Press / to select another fre- increasing the volume according to the speed quency.

2 Premium Sound 3 Certain audio systems

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close. Radio functions Automatic tuning Sound stage4 1. Select a wave band using FM or AM. The sound experience can be optimized for the 2. Press / on the navigation button. driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. Select one of the options under Manual tuning Audio settings Sound stage. 1. Select a wave band using FM or AM.

Optimal sound reproduction 2. Turn TUNING to select a station. The audio system is calibrated for optimal Preset stations sound reproduction using digital signal pro- Ten station presets can be stored for each cessing. wave band. FM has two memories for presets: 04 This calibration takes into account factors such FM1 and FM2. The stored presets are selected as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the using the preset buttons. Center console, controls for radio functions listeners' seating positions, etc., for each com- Navigation button for automatic tuning Preset storage can be carried out manually or bination of vehicle/audio system. automatically. Press to cancel a menu selection or a There is also a dynamic calibration that takes Manually storing preset stations into consideration the volume level, radio selected function 1. Tune into a station. reception, and the speed of the vehicle. Manual tuning 2. Hold in one of the preset buttons until the The settings that are described in this manual, Scan the current wave band message Channel stored appears on the such as Bass, Treble, and Equalizer front/ display. Equalizer rear are only intended to enable the Auto store the strongest radio stations in user to adapt sound reproduction to his/her the area in which you are driving Automatically storing preset stations The function is especially useful in areas where personal tastes. Station preset buttons the radio stations and their frequencies are Select wave band AM and FM (FM1 and unfamiliar. The ten strongest radio stations are FM2) stored automatically in a separate memory. 1. Select a wave band using FM or AM.

4 Certain markets only.

137 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring appears 1. Select a wave band using AM or FM. center console storage compartment. A stand- on the display. ard cable from an iPod or MP3 player can be 2. Press SCAN. routed under the cover to the AUX connector Once Autostoring disappears from the dis- > SCAN appears on the display. Close in the storage compartment. play, the stations are stored. The radio contin- using SCAN or EXIT. ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the A sound source must be chosen, depending on display. The automatically stored presets can Radio text the device that has been connected: now be selected using the preset buttons. Some stations transmit information on pro- 1. Use MODE to select iPod or USB. The text Automatic preset storage can be cancelled gram content, artists, etc. This information can Connect device will be displayed. using EXIT. be shown on the display. 2. Connect the device to the connector in the Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam- Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Radio center console storage compartment (see 04 ple or . . AUTO FM text the illustration). Returning to Auto mode provides access to the The text Loading will be displayed while the autostored presets: USB/iPod connector* system loads the files (folder structure) on the 1. Press AUTO. device. This may take a short time. > Auto appears on the display. When information about the files (the folder 2. Press a preset button. structure) on the device has been loaded, the resulting list includes information on the artist, Scan genre and song title. The function automatically searches the cur- To navigate in the folder structure, press rent wave band for strong stations. When a ENTER and scroll up and down the folders station is found, it is played for approx. eight using the arrow buttons (on the audio system seconds before scanning is resumed. While control panel or on the steering wheel keypad). the station is playing it can be stored as a pre- Press the right arrow button to select a folder. set as usual. Press the left arrow button to go up a level in AUX and USB sockets in the storage compartment the folder structure. Press ENTER to go down NOTE between the front seats a level in the folder structure. Storing a station interrupts the SCAN func- An auxiliary device, such as an iPod, MP3 tion. player or a USB flash drive can be connected Tracks can be selected in two ways: to the audio system via the connectors in the

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

• Turn the manual tuning knob clockwise or NOTE Rear control panel with headphones counterclockwise socket* The system supports removable media that • Use the right or left arrow keys on the nav- uses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32 Headphones with an impedance of igation control to select the desired track. file system and can index up to 500 folders 16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher The arrow keys on the steering wheel key- and a maximum of 64,000 files. The device are recommended for best sound reproduc- pad can also be used in the same way. must have at least 256 Mb of memory. tion.

NOTE MP3 player The system supports playback of files in the Many MP3 players have a file indexing system most common versions of formats such as that is not supported by the vehicle's audio mp3, wma, and wav. However, there may be system. In order to use an MP3 player, the sys- 04 versions of these formats that the system tem must be set to USB Removable device/ does not support. Mass Storage Device. The system also supports a number of iPod models produced in 2005 or later. iPod iPod Shuffle is not supported. An iPod receives current and its battery is charged through the connecting cord. How- USB flash drive ever, if the iPod's battery is completely drained, it should be recharged before the To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is Volume control (right/left sides) advisable to only store music files on the drive. iPod is connected to the audio system. It will take considerably longer for the system Scroll/search forward and back to index the files on the drive if it contains any- NOTE 5 thing other than compatible music files. MODE – select AM, FM, HD Radio൅ , CD, When an iPod is used as a sound source, AUX, USB/iPod* and ON/OFF. the vehicle's audio system has a menu structure similar to the one in the iPod. See Headphones sockets (3.5 mm) the iPod's manual for detailed information. Activating/deactivating For further information, refer to the accessory The control panel is activated by pressing manual USB/iPod Music Interface. MODE when the audio system is switched on.

5 Available on U.S. models only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

It is switched off automatically when the audio HD Radio൅reception (U.S. models quency as the AM or FM station's present fre- system is switched off or by a long press on only) quency. MODE. Introduction The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" Scroll/search forward and backward since it is both analogue and digital. During Short presses on (2) are used to scroll between hybrid operation, receivers still continue to CD tracks or preset radio stations. Long receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks or to radio receivers incorporate both modes of search for radio stations automatically. reception, where the receiver will automatically switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal Limitations cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. 04 The audio source (FM, AM, CD, etc.) being When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, played in the speakers cannot be controlled the symbol will appear in the audio sys- from the rear control panel. tem display. More information about HD radio and IBOC can be found on Ibiquity's website, Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com. broadcast Benefits of digital broadcasting NOTE • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality and AM as analogue FM). HD radio volume may fade in and out at times due to coverage limitations. • Some FM frequencies offer a greater number of listening choices through “multicast- ing” (consisting of a frequency's main HD radio is a brand name registered by the channel and any sub-channels that may 6 Ibiquity digital corporation . They are the also be available on that particular fre- developer of a broadcasting technology called IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to the method of transmitting a digital radio broadcast signal centered on the same fre-

6 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

140 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

quency. See also the section "Sub-chan- channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2 NOTE nels" below). WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc. There may be a noticeable difference in • When receiving a digital signal there is no • Reception coverage area: Due to current sound quality when a change from analogue multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ IBOC transmitter power limitations, the to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such crackling due to outside influences. reception coverage area in digital mode is as: somewhat more limited than the station's How HD broadcasting works analogue coverage area. Please be aware • Volume increase or decrease HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio that as with any radio broadcast technol- • Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/ and broadcasts of this type are available in ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and Treble cut or boost many areas of the United States. However, building location can have positive or neg- • Time alignment (Digital program mate- there are a few key differences: ative effects on radio reception. rial in extreme cases can be as much as 04 • Instead of transmitting one analogue sig- • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue 8 seconds behind the analogue). This nal, stations send out a bundled signal – blending: Analogue to digital blending will will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect. both analogue and digital. occur as the signal strength reaches a pre- The above items are dependant on the set threshold in the receiver. This will be An HD radio receiver can receive both dig- broadcaster's equipment settings and do • noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio reception) and is normal. on the terrain and location of the vehicle receiver or antenna systems. (which will influence the signal strength), the receiver will determine which signal to Switching HD on or off receive. The factory setting for HD radio is on. However, when driving through areas with weak HD sig- Limitations nals (fringe areas), you may experience that the • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM radio repeatedly switches between analogue/ only): The main channel is the only channel digital and digital/analogue reception. If this that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig- happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub- To do so: channels, they are broadcast in digital mode only. The main FM channel will be displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC (Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate there are sub-channels available) The sub-FM

141 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

1. Be sure the audio system is switched on In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM NOTE and in AM or FM mode. wavebands only) will also have sub-channels When the radio has gone into HD mode, 2. Press MENU in the center console control offering additional types of programming or • it may take several seconds before the panel. music. ">" symbol (if the current frequency has 3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will dis- In such cases, the “>” symbol will be displayed any sub-channels) is displayed to the appear from the box on the display screen). to the left of the frequency number and a num- right of the frequency. Pressing the This will disable the radio's capability to receive ber will be displayed to the right of the fre- arrow keys before the number is dis- digital broadcasts but it will continue to func- quency number indicating that the currently played will cause the radio to tune to the tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel. next available radio station, not to the receiver. Please note that when HD is switched The "2" in the illustration indicates that you are current station's sub-channels. 04 off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan- currently listening to the first sub-channel on • When you are no longer in broadcasting nels (see the following section for a more frequency 93.9. range of the currently tuned sub-chan- detailed explanation of sub-channels). Selecting sub-channels nel, No HD reception will be displayed. The radio will then be muted Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press and it will be necessary to tune to or the right arrow key on the center console or on (an X will appear in the box on the display search for a new radio station. screen). the steering wheel keypad. To go back to the main channel, press the left arrow key. To go Sub-channels to subchannel 2 (if available), press the right Sub-channels can also be stored as presets, arrow key. see page 137 for information on storing stations. If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main channel, pressing the left arrow key will tune to If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it the next lower radio frequency. may take up to 6 seconds before the channel becomes audible. If you press this button while you are out of digital range of the transmitter, No HD reception will be displayed.

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

142 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Sirius satellite radio* SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed (see NOTE also "Selecting a channel". Listening to satellite radio • The category ALL is default, which ena- The Sirius satellite system consists of a number 2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474). bles you to scroll through the entire list of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous 3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press of available satellite channels. orbit. AUTO to display this number. It is also • The channel categories are automati- possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the cally updated several times a year. This NOTE menu. takes approximately two minutes and will interrupt normal broadcasting. A 4. Updating subscription will be displayed • The digital signals from the Sirius satel- message will be displayed while updat- lites are line-of-sight, which means that while the subscription is being updated, ing is in progress. Information on chan- physical obstructions such as bridges, after which the display will return to the nel or feature updates is available at 04 tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere normal view. www.sirius.com. with signal reception. SIRIUS ID • Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects transported on roof racks or The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the Selecting a channel in a ski box, or other antennas that may Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your There are three ways of tuning in a channel: account and when making any account trans- impede signals from the SIRIUS satel- • Using the left and right arrow keys lites. actions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN). • By turning the tuning control • Through direct channel entry. Selecting Sirius radio mode Selecting a channel category 1. Press Power to switch on the audio sys- 1. Select Sirius radio mode as described NOTE tem (see page 136 and see page 137 for above. information on the standard audio and • The numbers of skipped or locked 2. Press ENTER. radio functions). channels will not be displayed. 3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll 2. Press the MODE button repeatedly until • If a channel is locked, the access code through the list of categories. Sirius 1 or 2 is displayed. must be entered before the channel can 4. Press ENTER or the right arrow key to be selected. See "Unlocking a channel" Activating Sirius radio on page 145. select a category. 1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no audio, which means that the channel is > The first channel in the selected cate- unsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539- gory will then be played.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Direct channel entry Song Seek and Song Memory will be alerted by a text message and an audi- The Sirius satellite channels are in numerical The Song seek and Song memory functions ble signal. order throughout all of the categories. To provide both audio and visual notification when Press ENTER to listen to the song or EXIT to access a channel directly: Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs. cancel. enables you to store the name of 1. Press MENU and scroll to Direct channel Song seek the song for future advance notification when To activate/deactivate the song seek function: entry. that song is being played. The Song memory 1. Press MENU 2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the feature makes it possible to view all of the cur- channel's number. rent songs that are stored in memory. 2. Scroll to Song seek 3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this Song memory 3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the function. 04 channel, even if it belongs to a category Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's other than the currently selected one. memory. NOTE Scanning 1. Press MENU. SCAN automatically searches through the list When the song has ended, the radio will 2. Scroll to Add song to song memory and remain tuned to the channel on which the of satellite channels. The search will only be follow the instructions shown in the dis- song was played. carried out in the selected category, see play. page 137 for more detailed information. If a new song is selected when the memory is Radio text Storing a channel full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to The text that is displayed about the song that A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored; delete the last song on the list. is currently playing can be changed. Use the 10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2, see AUTO button or the menu to display the Artist, page 137 for detailed information on storing NOTE Title, Composer, or switch radio text off. channels. The remaining songs in the list will move • A long press on one of the number keys down one position, and the newly added stores the currently tuned channel on that song will be placed at the top of the list. key. • A short press on a number key while the Song seek radio is in Sirius 1or 2 mode will tune to the When a satellite radio channel plays one of the preset satellite channel stored on that but- songs stored in the song memory, the listener ton, regardless of the currently selected channel category.

144 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Advanced settings Skipping a channel Locking a channel: This menu function enables you to make set- 1. Select Channel skip list and press 1. Select Sirius ID in the menu and select tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions. ENTER. Lock options and press ENTER. To access this menu: 2. Select a category in the list and press 2. Select Channel lock list and press 1. Press MENU. ENTER. ENTER 2. Scroll to the Sirius menu. 3. Skip channels in the list presented by 3. Enter the channel access code7 and press pressing ENTER or right arrow key. ENTER. 3. Select Advanced Sirius settings…. Unskip all channels 4. Select a category in the list and press WARNING This permanently removes all channels from ENTER. the skip list and makes them available for 04 Settings should be made when the vehicle selection. 5. Lock channels in the list presented by is at a standstill. pressing ENTER or right arrow. Temp. unskip all ch. This function will temporarily unskip all chan- The channel is now locked and a checked box The following settings can be made in the Sir- nels and make them available for selection. The will be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec- 7 ius menu: channels remain on the skip list and will again essary to enter the channel access code in • The list of saved songs can be displayed be skipped the next time the ignition is order to listen to a locked channel. switched on. • Channel skip settings can be made Unlocking a channel • Channel lock settings can be made Channel lock A channel's access code7 is required to unlock • The channel access code can be displayed Access to specific channels can be restricted a channel. or changed (locked). A locked channel will not provide Unlock all channels • Your Sirius ID can be displayed audio, song titles, or artist information. This permanently removes all channels from the locked list and makes them available for Skip options NOTE selection. This function is used to remove a channel from All channels are initially unlocked. the list of available channels. Temp. unlock all ch. This function will temporarily unlock all channels and make them available for selection. The channels remain on the locked list and will

7 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

145 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

again be locked the next time the ignition is CD functions Playing a CD (CD changer) switched on. If a CD position with a music CD is already CHANGE CODE selected when CD is pressed, it will be played This function makes it possible to change the automatically. Otherwise select a disc with the channel access code. The default code is number buttons 1 – 6 or / on the naviga- 0000. tion button. To change the code: Insert a CD (CD changer) 1. Select Change code and press ENTER. 1. Select an empty position with the number buttons 1 – 6 or / on the navigation 2. Enter the current code and press ENTER. 04 button. 3. Enter the new code and press ENTER. > An empty position is marked on the dis- 4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER. play. The text Insert disc shows that a Center console, controls for CD functions new disc can be inserted. The CD If an incorrect code is entered, the text CD insert and eject changer can hold up to six CDs. Incorrect code is displayed. 2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot. If you have forgotten the access code: CD slot 1. Select Sirius ID in the Sirius settings menu Navigation button for changing CD tracks Disc eject and press ENTER. For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected CD Fast-back and change CD track 2. Press and hold the ENTER button for must be removed within 12 seconds or it will 2 seconds. CD changer* position selection be automatically drawn back into the slot and the CD player will enter pause mode. Press the 3. The current code will be displayed. Scan CD CD button to restart the disc. Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with 8 Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but- assistance. Playing a CD (CD player ) ton. SIRIUS ID If a music CD is in the player when CD is pressed, it will be played automatically. Other- Eject all discs with a long press on the eject This function displays the 12-digit Sirius acti- wise, insert a disc and press CD. button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by vation ID. disc.

8 Certain markets only.

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

NOTE tem's menu structure. Sound files have the NOTE symbol and directories have the The Eject all function can only be used while It is only possible to scroll between random the vehicle is at a standstill and will be can- symbol. Press ENTER to play a selected folder CD tracks on the current disc. celled if the vehicle begins to move. or a file. When the music file has been played, the Different messages are displayed depending Pause player will continue to play the rest of the files on which random function has been selected: When the audio system volume is turned off in the current folder. When all of the files in the • Random means that the tracks from only completely, the CD player will pause and will folder have been played, the player will auto- one music CD are played resume playing when the volume is turned up matically go to the next folder and play the files again. in it. • RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the optional CD changer are 04 Sound files Fast-forward/change CD tracks and played. In addition to playing normal music CDs, the sound files • Folder means that the sound files in a CD player/changer can also play discs con- Short presses / on the navigation button directory on the current CD are played. taining files in mp3 or wma format. are used to scroll between CD tracks/sound CD player files. Long presses are used to search within If a normal music CD is being played, activate/ CD tracks/sound files. TUNING (or the steering NOTE deactivate under Random. wheel keypad) can also be used for this pur- Some copy protected sound files may not pose. If a disc with sound files is being played, acti- be read by the player. vate/deactivate under Random Folder. Scan CD When a CD containing sound files is inserted This function plays the first ten seconds of CD changer into the player the disc's directory structure is each CD track/sound file. Press SCAN to acti- If a normal music CD is being played under scanned before the CD begins playing. The vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue Random Single disc or Random length of time that this takes depends on the playing the current CD track/sound file. All discs. The All discs feature only applies quality of the disc. to the music CDs in the changer. Random Navigating the disc and playing tracks This function plays the tracks in random order If a CD with sound files is being played, acti- If a disc containing sound files is inside the CD (shuffle). The random CD tracks/sound files vate/deactivate instead under Random player, press ENTER to display the disc's can be scrolled through in the normal way. Folder. If you select another CD the function is directory structure. The directory structure is deactivated. navigated in the same way as the audio sys-

147 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Disc text If title information is stored on a music CD it can be shown on the display9. Activate/deactivate in CD mode under CD settings Disc text.

9 Only applies to the CD changer.

148 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Introduction and other controls on the cell phone can Bluetooth® functions in the center always be used regardless of whether or not console control panel the phone is connected to the hands-free system.

NOTE Not all cell phones are fully compatible with the hands-free system. A list of compatible phones is available at your Volvo retailer or at www.volvocars.us 04 WARNING System overview Never use the hands-free feature or any Cell phone other device in your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. VOLUME – This function is also available on the steering wheel keypad. Location of the microphone Distraction can lead to a serious accident. Keys containing letters and numbers for Steering wheel keypad dialing numbers, adding phone book Center console control panel and display entries, etc. PHONE – Press to activate/deactivate the Bluetooth® hands-free Bluetooth® function This feature makes it possible to set up a wire- Navigation buttons less connection between a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system. EXIT – Press to end or defer calls, erase This enables the audio system to function as a characters that have been entered, end an hands-free connection and allows you to ongoing function. This function is also remote-control a number of the phone’s func- available on the steering wheel keypad. tions. The microphone used by this system is ENTER – Answer a call. Press once to dis- located in the ceiling console (2). The buttons play the most recently dialed number. This

149 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

function is also available on the steering Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus disconnect it from the hands-free system wheel keypad. (by pressing PHONE in the center console 1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® func- for several seconds). tion (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual if Getting started necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com 2. Perform a search using the cell phone’s Bluetooth® function (consult the cell Use the controls on steering wheel keypad (3) 2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth® hands- phone’s owner’s manual if necessary). and in the center console (4) to access, navi- free system by briefly pressing the gate and make selections in the hands-free PHONE button. 3. Select My Car in the list of devices shown system’s menus (see page 149). > Add phone will be displayed. If one or in the cell phone’s display. Activating/deactivating more cell phones are already registered 4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234 04 A short press on the PHONE button in the cen- in the system, they will also be dis- in the cell phone. ter console activates the hands-free system. played. 5. Connect to My Car from the cell phone. The text PHONE will appear at the top of the 3. Select Add phone. display to indicate that the audio system is in The cell phone will be registered and will be > The audio system will search for cell telephone mode. connected automatically to the audio system phones that are in range. This search while the text Synchronizing is displayed. For The symbol indicates that the hands-free takes approximately 30 seconds. Any more information on synchronizing a cell system is active. phones detected will be displayed with phone, see page 152. their Bluetooth® names. The hands-free A long press on the PHONE button deactivates system’s Bluetooth® name will appear When a connection has been established, the the hands-free system and disconnects the symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth® cell phone. in the cell phone’s display as My Car. name will be displayed. The cell phone can 4. Select one of the cell phones shown in the now be controlled from the audio system. Connecting cell phones audio system’s (center console) display. The procedure for connecting a cell phone var- Making a call ies, depending on the phone itself, and on 5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the 1. Ensure thatPHONE is shown at the top of whether or not the phone has been previously digits shown in the audio system’s display. the center console display and that the connected. Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus symbol is visible (by pressing briefly on If this is the first time the phone is to be con- 1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly PHONE on the center console). nected to the hands-free system, proceed as pressing the PHONE button in the center 2. Dial the desired phone number or use the follows: console. If there is a cell phone connected, phone book (see page 152).

150 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

3. Press ENTER. Handling calls NOTE End the call by pressing EXIT. Incoming calls • On certain cell phones, the connection is broken when the mute function is Disconnecting the cell phone Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the used, which is normal. If this happens, The cell phone is automatically disconnected audio system is currently in e.g., CD or FM mode. the hands-free system will prompt you from the audio system if it is moved out of to reconnect. range. For more information about connec- Press EXIT to defer a call. tions, see page 150. • A new call cannot be initiated while Automatic answer another call is in progress. The cell phone can be manually disconnected This function means that incoming calls will be from the hands-free system by pressing answered automatically. Activate or deactivate 04 PHONE. The hands-free system is also deac- the function in the menu system under Phone Sound settings tivated when the ignition is switched off (or if settings Call options Automatic the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equip- Call volume answer. ped with the optional keyless drive). Call volume can be adjusted when the hands- When the cell phone is disconnected from the Call settings free system is activated. Use the buttons in the hands-free system, a call in progress can be While a call is in progress, press MENU or steering wheel keypad or the audio system’s continued using the cell phone’s own speaker ENTER on the center console to access the volume control. following functions: and microphone. Audio system volume • Mute microphone–mute the audio sys- While a phone call is in progress, volume for NOTE tem’s microphone. the audio system can be adjusted in the normal Certain cell phones may require confirma- • Transfer call to mobile–transfer the call way with the audio system's volume control. In tion from the phone’s keypad when a call is from hands-free to the cell phone. order to adjust volume during a phone call, the transferred from hands-free to the cell audio system must be switched to one of the • Phone book–this feature enables you to phone. other modes (FM, CD, etc). search for a stored telephone number. Audio system sound can be automatically muted when a phone call is received in Phone settings Sounds and volume Mute radio and adjust the volume with the / keys on the center console.

151 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Ringing volume More information about registering A connection can also be established in the Go to Phone settings Sounds and and connecting cell phones menu system under Bluetooth Connect volume Ring volume and adjust the vol- A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registered phone or Change phone. ume with the / keys on the center con- in the hands-free system. Registration only needs to be done once for each phone. After sole. Phone book registration, the cell phone no longer needs to Ringing tones be in sight or searchable. Only one cell phone In order to use the hands-free system’s phone book (list of contacts), PHONE must be dis- The hands-free system’s integrated ringing can be connected to hands-free at a time. played at the top of the center console display tones can be selected in Phone settings Phones can be unregistered in Bluetooth and the symbol must be visible. Sounds and volume Ring signals Remove phone 04 Ring signal 1, etc. The audio system stores a copy of the phone Automatic connection book of each registered cell phone. The phone When the hands-free system is active and the book is automatically copied each time a NOTE most recently connected cell phone is within phone is connected. This function can be acti- The connected cell phone’s ring tone is not range, it is detected automatically. When the vated in Phone settings Synchronize audio system searches for the most recently switched off when one of the hands-free phone book. Searches for contacts are only system's ringing tones is used. connected phone, this phone’s name appears made in the phone book of the currently con- in the display. To manually connect a different nected cell phone. If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s cell phone, press EXIT. 1 ring tone , go to Phone settings Manual connection NOTE Sounds and volume Ring signals To connect a phone other than the one that If a particular cell phone does not support Use mobile phone signal was most recently connected or to switch copying of the phone book, List is empty between cell phones that are already regis- will be displayed when copying has been tered in the hands-free system: completed. 1. Put the audio system in telephone mode. If the phone book contains information about 2. Press PHONE in the center console and select one of the phones on the list. someone who is trying to call you, this information will be shown in the display.

1 Not supported by all cell phones.

152 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Searching for contacts Call lists Button Function The easiest way to search for a contact in the Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are cop- phone book is to press and hold any of the ied to the hands-free system each time that Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( ) buttons 2–9. This starts a search based on the phone is connected. These lists are then upda- first letter on the button that has been pressed. ted while the phone is connected. Press A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç ENTER to show the most recently dialed num- The phone book can also be accessed by bers. Other call lists can be found under Call pressing the navigation buttons / on the register. D E F 3 È É center console or by pressing / on the steering wheel keypad. A search can also be NOTE G H I 4 Ì made in the phone book’s search menu in 04 Phone book Search: Certain cell phones display the list of the most recently dialed numbers in reverse J K L 5 1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s name order. and press ENTER or simply press ENTER. M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø 2. Select the desired contact and press Entering text ENTER to make a call to that person. Text is entered by using the number buttons in P Q R S 7 ß the center console. Press a button once to Voice control enter the first letter on the button, twice to enter If the cell phone that is currently connected T U V 8 Ü Ù the second letter, etc. Continue to press the allows calls to be made via voice commands, button to display other characters. this function can be used by pressing and hold- W X Y Z 9 ing ENTER. Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that Voice mail number have been entered. Use the / buttons on Press briefly if two characters are to be entered in succession from The phone number to your voice mail can be the center console to navigate among the char- the same button. changed in the menu Phone settings acters. Call options Voice mail number. If no + 0 @ * # & $ £ / % number has been stored, this menu can be accessed by a prolonged press on button 1. Shift between uppercase and Once a phone number has been stored, press lowercase letters and hold 1 to dial this number.

153 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Bluetooth® menus 1. Missed calls 2. Received calls 3 Dialed calls 4. Phone book 4.1. Search 4.2. Copy fr. mobile phone 5. Bluetooth... 04 5.1. Change phone 5.2. Connect phone 5.3. Disconnect phone 5.4. Connect fr. mobile phone 6. Phone settings 6.1. Call options 6.1.2. Automatic answer 6.1.3. Voice mail number 6.2. Sounds and volume 6.3. IDIS 6.4. Synchronize phone book

154 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

Introduction Functions updated every few seconds. When the vehicle is stationary, "----" appears on the display. NOTE Average fuel consumption If a warning message appears while you are The average fuel consumption since the last using the trip computer, this message must reset. Reset using RESET. be acknowledged in order to return to the trip computer function. Acknowledge a Driving distance on current fuel reserve message by pressing READ. This function shows the approximate distance that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the To change the unit of measure specified for tank. The calculation is based on average fuel distance and speed, contact an authorized consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) 04 Volvo workshop. G022909 of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank when the reading was taken. When the Information display and controls Average speed message ---- miles to empty tank appears in READ–press to acknowledge/confirm/ The system calculates the average speed from the display, refuel as soon as possible. erase a message) the last resetting. Reset using RESET. Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip Current speed in mph (Canadian models NOTE computer menus) only) The actual distance that can be driven on RESET–resets certain functions This function provides the driver with an instan- the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be taneous conversion of the car's current speed influenced by a change in driving style. To scroll through trip computer information, from km/h to mph. move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue See also page 198 for information on driving turning to return to the starting point. Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only) economically. This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed Resetting from mph to km/h. 1. Select --- mph average speed or --.- mpg average. Current fuel consumption 2. (Instantaneous) Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected function. If Current fuel consumption is calculated every RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three second. The information on the display is

155 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

seconds, Average speed and Average fuel consumption are reset simultaneously.

156 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Compass

Operation netic zone. The character C is shown in the Selecting a magnetic zone mirror's display if calibration is necessary. 1 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely 2 out of traffic and away from steel structures 15 14 and high-tension electrical wires. 3

2. Start the vehicle. 13 4 NOTE 12 5 8 For best results from calibration, switch off 11 9 all electrical equipment in the vehicle (cli- 10 04 mate system, windshield wipers, audio sys- 6 7 G018632 G029737 tem, etc.) and make sure that all doors are Rearview mirror with compass. closed. Magnetic zones. The rearview mirror has an integrated display The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. that shows the compass direction in which the 3. Using a pen or similar object, press and The correct zone must be selected for the com- vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are hold the button on the rear side of mirror pass to work correctly. until C is shown again in the mirror(after shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE 1. Put the ignition in mode II. (north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), approx. 6 seconds). 2. Using a pen or similar object, press and SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest). 4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the dis- hold the button on the rear side of mirror play when calibration is complete. The compass is displayed automatically when for at least 3 seconds. The number for the the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To Alternative calibration method: current area will be shown. switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no object and press in the button on the rear side 3. Press the button repeatedly until the num- more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disap- of the mirror. ber for the required geographic area pears from the display when calibration is (1 – 15) is shown. complete. Calibration 4. The display will revert to showing the com- The compass may need to be calibrated if, for pass direction after several seconds. example, the vehicle is driven into a new mag-

157 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Stability system

Introduction Spin control (SC) Temporarily switching off Spin control The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control The spin control function is designed to help 1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC system (DSTC) consists of a number of func- prevent the drive wheels from spinning while menu is shown. tions designed help reduce wheel spin, coun- the vehicle is accelerating. 2. Hold down the RESET button to toggle teract skidding, and to generally help improve Under certain circumstances, such as when between DSTC ON and DSTC spin directional stability. driving with snow chains, or driving in deep control OFF. snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to CAUTION temporarily switch off this function for maxi- Messages in the information display A pulsating sound will be audible when the mum tractive force. DSTC Temporarily OFF – system function system is actively operating and is normal. has been temporarily reduced due to high 04 WARNING brake disc temperature. The function is acti- Traction control (TC) The car's handling and stability characteris- vated automatically when the brakes have This function is designed to help reduce wheel tics will be altered if the spin control function cooled. spin by transferring power from a drive wheel has been disabled. DSTC Service required – the system has that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the been disabled due to a fault. If this occurs: opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle). Operation 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off TC is most active at low speeds. the engine. This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and 2. Restart the engine. cannot be switched off. If the message remains when the engine is Active Yaw Control (AYC) restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo work- This function helps maintain directional stabil- shop to have the system inspected. ity, for example when cornering, by braking Symbols in the instrument panel one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally. If the symbols and are displayed at the same time, read the message in the This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and information display.

cannot be switched off. G021409 If the symbol appears alone, it may appear as follows:

158 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Stability system

• If the symbol flashes, this indicates that the stability system is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid. • If the symbol remains on for approximately 2 seconds after the engine has been started, this indicates that the system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but 04 can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

159 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Active chassis system–Four C

Active chassis (Four C)* Operation NOTE Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con- This steering force level menu function can- trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha- not be accessed when the vehicle is in racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the motion. car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.

Comfort Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm. 04 This mode is particularly suitable for long-distance highway driving. The indicator light in the button will be on when this mode is selected. Chassis settings Sport Use the buttons in the center console to In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is change setting. The setting in use when the reduced during cornering and steering engine is switched off is activated the next time response is more immediate. The transmission the engine is started. shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The indicator light in the button will be on to indi- Speed-dependent steering force* cate that Sport mode has been selected. Steering force increases with the speed of the Advanced vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in and steering response is very direct. Gear shift- order to facilitate parking, etc. ing is done at high rpm in each gear for Steering force can be changed under Car dynamic and active driving. settings Steering force level. For a description of the menu system, see page 124.

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control

Operation > The symbol illuminates and the text NOTE --- mph current speed (5) indicates A temporary increase in speed by that cruise control is in standby mode. • pressing the accelerator pedal, for less than 1 minute (e.g. when passing NOTE another car), does not affect the current This does not set the vehicle's speed. cruise control setting. The vehicle will automatically return to the previously set speed when the accelerator pedal is Setting a speed released. Use the or buttons set the vehicle's cur- • If one of the cruise control buttons is rent speed. The set speed is shown in the dis- kept depressed for more than approx. 04 play. G022910 1 minute cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off in Steering wheel-mounted controls and display NOTE order to reset cruise control. Standby mode Cruise control cannot be engaged at Resume set speed speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). Automatic deactivation Cruise control is automatically deactivated Deactivating Adjusting the set speed temporarily if one of the following occurs: Activate/set speed After a speed has been set, it can be increased • If the speed drops below approximately or decreased by using the or buttons. 20 mph (30 km/h). Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate When the brake pedal is depressed. standby mode) 1. Press and hold down or until the • vehicle reaches the desired speed. • If the gear selector is moved to position N. Engaging the cruise control function > This will become the set speed when the • During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. Before a speed can be set, the cruise control button is released. system must be engaged (put in standby • If the vehicle's speed is increased by using the accelerator pedal for more than mode). 2. Press or for approximately a half 1 minute. Press the CRUISE button (1). second and release the button to increase or decrease vehicle speed by approxi- The currently set speed will be saved in the mately 1 mph (1.6 km/h). system's memory.

161 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control

Temporary deactivation The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise control by pressing 0. The saved speed is shown in brackets in the information display.

Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set speed. 04 WARNING There may be a significant increase in speed after the button has been pressed.

Deactivation Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE, by putting the gear selector in Neutral, or by switching off the engine. The set speed is cleared.

WARNING Cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic or when driving on wet or slippery roads. Cruise control may not maintain set speed on steep downgrades.

162 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Auto-brake*

Introduction WARNING Function Collision Warning with Auto-brake is designed The collision warning system does not to assist the driver if there is a risk of a collision • work in all driving situations, and traffic, with the vehicle ahead, if that vehicle is at a weather and road conditions. standstill or moving in the same direction as your vehicle. Auto-brake helps reduce the col- • The collision warning system is not lision speed. designed to detect pedestrians. • Warnings are only provided when the Collision Warning consists of the following risk of collision is high. The Function three functions: section provides information about lim- Collision warning warns the driver of the itations that the driver must be aware of • 04 imminent risk of a collision. before use.

• Brake support helpsthe driver brake effi- • Never wait for a collision warning. This G017382 ciently in a critical situation. system is designed to be a supplemen- Function overview tary driving aid. It is not, however, • Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati- Visual warning signal, collision risk cally if a collision cannot be avoided. intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is Radar sensor responsible for maintaining a safe dis- WARNING tance and speed, even when the colli- Camera The auto-brake function cannot prevent a sion warning system is in use. collision but instead is intended to reduce • Maintenance of the collision warning Collision warning speed at the moment of impact. For full system components must only be per- The radar sensor and the camera work braking effect, driver must apply the brakes. formed by a trained and qualified Volvo together to detect stationary vehicles and vehi- technician. cles that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk of collision, the driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light and an audible warning signal. Collision warning is active at speeds above 5 mph (7 km/h).

Brake support If the risk of collision continues to increase after the collision warning has been given, brake

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Auto-brake*

support is activated. Brake support prepares On and off WARNING the brake system to react quickly, and the To switch Collision Warning on or off, go into The setting should only be used brakes are applied slightly. This may be expe- the menu Car settings Collision • Short rienced as a light tug. in situations where traffic is light and warning settings and select On or Off. When moving at low speeds. If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking the engine is started, the setting that was Collision Warning alerts the driver to the effect will be provided, even if pressure on the selected when it was switched off will be used. • risk of a collision but this function can- brake pedal is light. Activating/deactivating warning signals not reduce the driver’s reaction time. Auto-brake The collision warning system’s audible and vis- • For Collision Warning to be as effective If a collision is imminent and the driver has not ual signals are activated automatically when as possible, it is recommended that Dis- the engine is started if the collision warning tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see 04 applied the brakes, the auto-brake function is activated without the driver pressing the brake system is activated. page 176. pedal. Limited brake force is applied to reduce The audible warning signal can be activated/ the vehicle’s speed when the collision occurs. deactivated by selecting the alternative NOTE Collision warning on or Collis'n warning When adaptive cruise control is used, WARNING OFF in Car settings Collision warning • the warning light and signal will be used The auto-brake function cannot prevent a settings Warning sound. by cruise control, even if they have been collision but instead is intended to reduce deactivated by the driver. speed at the moment of impact. For full Setting a warning distance In situations where traffic is moving at braking effect, driver must apply the brakes. This setting determines the distance at which • considerably different speeds, or if the the visual and audible warnings are triggered. vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn- Select , or under NOTE Long Normal Short Car ings may be considered to be late, even settings Collision warning settings The auto-brake function is always on and if the setting Long has been selected. cannot be turned off. Warning distance The warning distance determines the level of Checking settings sensitivity used by the system. The warning The current Collision Warning settings can be Operation distance Long provides an earlier warning. checked by going into the menu system at Car Some settings are controlled from the center Begin by using Long and if the system gives settings Collision warning settings. console via a menu system. For information on too many warnings, try changing to Normal. See page 124 for more information on the how the menu system is used, see page 124. menu system.

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Auto-brake*

Limitations WARNING NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is • In certain situations, the system cannot If warnings are given too frequently, the warning distance can be reduced (see not looking straight ahead may make the visual provide warnings or warning may be delayed if traffic conditions or other page 164. This causes the system to pro- warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. external factors make it impossible for vide later warnings, which decreases the For this reason, always activate the audible the radar sensor or camera to detect the total number of warnings provided. warning signal in such conditions. vehicle ahead. The camera’s limitations NOTE • Warnings may not be provided if the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, The camera is used by Collision Warning with The visual warning signal may be temporar- or if movements of the steering wheel/ Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see ily disengaged in the event of high passen- brake pedal are great, such as during page 179), and Lane Departure Warning (see 04 ger compartment temperature due to strong active driving. page 182). sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible warning signal will be used, even if it has • The sensor system has a limited range been deactivated in the menu system. for stationary or slow-moving vehicles NOTE and may therefore give delayed or no To help protect the camera in very hot warnings if your vehicle’s speed is • conditions, it may be temporarily Warnings may not appear if the distance to the above approximately 45 mph switched off for approximately 15 vehicle ahead is very small or if steering wheel (70 km/h). and pedal movements are great, for example, minutes after the engine has been Warnings for stationary or slow-moving due to a very active driving style. • started. vehicles may not be provided in dark Keep the section of the windshield in conditions. • front of the camera clean and free of ice, snow, or condensation. The Collision Warning system uses the same radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 172. If no warning is given, or if a warning is delayed, Auto-brake will also not be provided or will be delayed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Auto-brake*

WARNING Fault tracing and actions If the message Windscreen Sensors • The camera has the same limitations as blocked is displayed, this means that the cam- the human eye. In other words, its era is obscured and cannot detect vehicle or “vision is impaired” by adverse weather road marker lines in front of the vehicle. conditions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog, etc. These conditions may This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with reduce the function of systems that Auto-brake, Lane Departure Warning, and depend on the camera or cause these Driver Alert Control will not have full function- systems to temporarily stop functionality. ing. The table lists possible causes for this mes- 04 • Never place any objects, decals, etc., sage being displayed, and suitable actions. on the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the camera’s function, and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize the camera to stop functioning. • Strong sunlight, reflections from the road surface, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may drastically reduce the camera’s capacity to detect the side of a lane or another vehicle.

Cause Action The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera. with ice or snow.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera.

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Auto-brake*

Cause Action The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register display. visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description Collis'n warning OFF Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will dis- 04 appear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the READ button.

Collision warn. Unavaila- Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate ble the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button.

Auto braking was acti- Auto-braking has been active. vated

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by blocked snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see page 165 for more information on the camera’s limitations.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Auto-brake*

Symbol Message Description Radar blocked See man- Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for ual example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other vehicles, see page 172 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning. required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Introduction WARNING Function Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional Adaptive cruise control cannot cover all system designed to assist the driver by main- • driving situations and traffic, weather taining a set speed or a set distance to the and road conditions. The Function sec- vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use tion provides information about limita- on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as tions that the driver must be aware of on highways and other main roads. before using the adaptive cruise control. WARNING • This system is designed to be a supple- • Do not use the adaptive cruise control mentary driving aid. It is not, however, system in demanding driving conditions intended to replace the driver's atten- 04

such as city traffic, winding roads, at tion and judgement. The driver is G021412 intersections, on slippery surfaces, in responsible for maintaining a safe dis- poor visibility, heavy rain, etc. tance and speed and must intervene if Function overview adaptive cruise control does not main- Maintenance of cruise control compo- Warning light, braking by driver required • tain a suitable speed or suitable dis- nents must only be performed by an tance. Controls authorized Volvo workshop. Radar sensor in front grille Adaptive cruise control consists of: • A cruise control system to maintain a set speed • A system to maintain a set distance to the vehicle ahead (expressed as a time interval. For example, you can choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING of the vehicle ahead exceeds the speed that WARNING you have set. • Adaptive cruise control is not a collision When adaptive cruise control disengages, avoidance system. The driver is always The adaptive cruise control system is designed the brakes will not be modulated automati- responsible for applying the brakes if to smoothly regulate speed. However, the cally. The driver must assume full control the system does not detect another driver must apply the brakes in situations that over the vehicle. vehicle. require immediate braking. This applies when • Adaptive cruise control does not react there are great differences in speed between Warning light-driver braking required to slow moving or stationary vehicles. vehicles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes sud- Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity denly. that is equivalent to approximately 30% of the The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations 04 WARNING lane) is measured by a radar sensor. Your vehi- requiring more brake force than ACC can pro- cle's speed is regulated by acceleration and Due to limitations in the radar sensor, brak- vide, if the driver does not apply the brakes, an braking. The brakes may emit a sound when ing may occur unexpectedly or not at all, audible signal will sound and a red warning they are being modulated by the adaptive see page 172. light will illuminate in the windshield to alert the cruise control system. This is normal. driver to react. Adaptive cruise control can only be activated WARNING at speeds above 20mph (30 km/h). If speed NOTE falls below 20 mph (30 km/h) or if engine speed Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light The brake pedal moves when the adaptive (rpm) becomes too low, adaptive cruise control cruise control system modulates the contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the disengages and will no longer modulate the driver is not looking straight ahead may brake pedal. brakes. In situations when adaptive cruise con- make the visual warning signal in the wind- trol cannot be activated Cruise control shield difficult to see. Unavailable is shown in the display, see The adaptive cruise control system is designed page 174. to follow the vehicle ahead of you in the same WARNING lane, at a set time interval. Cruise control only warns of vehicles If the radar sensor has not detected a vehicle detected by the radar sensor, see page 172. In some cases there may be no ahead, the system will then attempt to maintain warning or the warning may be delayed. The the set speed. This is also the case if the speed driver should always apply the brakes when necessary.

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Operation illuminates in the display and (---) indicate NOTE that ACC is in standby mode. • If one of the adaptive cruise control but- Setting a speed tons is pressed for more than approxi- Use the or buttons to store (set) the mately one minute, ACC will be deactivated. The engine must then be vehicle's current speed. The set speed, for switched off and restarted to reset ACC. example 55 mph, is shown in the display. • In some situations cruise control cannot be activated. Cruise control NOTE Unavailable is shown in the display, Adaptive cruise control cannot be engaged see page 174. at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). 04 Setting a time interval Controls and display The “car” symbol illuminates The set time interval to vehicles ahead is on the left side of the display increased with and decreased with . The Activate and resume settings, increase when the radar sensor current time interval is shown briefly in the dis- speed detects another vehicle play following adjustment. Standby mode, on/off ahead. The distance to a vehicle ahead is only regulated Five different time intervals Set time interval when this symbol is illumi- can be selected and are Activate and set a speed nated. shown in the display as 1–5 horizontal bars. The greater Set speed (parentheses indicate standby Adjusting the set speed the number of bars, the longer mode) After a speed has been set, it can be increased the time interval. At low Time interval while it is being set or decreased by using the or buttons. speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases the Time interval after it has been set When the system is in active mode, the but- time interval slightly. In order to follow the vehi- ton has the same function as , but results in cle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows Engaging the cruise control function a smaller increase in speed. the time interval to vary considerably in certain Before ACC can be used, it must first be put in situations. standby mode. To do so, press . The symbol

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING trol. The set speed is then cleared and cannot must then intervene and adapt the vehicle's be resumed. speed to the surrounding traffic. • Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. When ACC is activated, the vehicle’s speed Automatic deactivation may be caused if: increases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h) • A short time interval gives the driver lim- • the vehicle's speed falls below 20 mph ited reaction time if an unexpected sit- each additional time is pressed. (30 km/h) uation occurs in traffic. Deactivation due to action by the driver • the wheels lose traction or if the anti-lock ACC is deactivated: brake system (ABS) is activated The number of bars indicating the selected • brake temperature is high • when the brakes are applied time interval are shown while the setting is • engine speed (rpm) is too low being made and for several seconds afterward. • if the gear selector is moved to N 04 the radar sensor is obstructed by, for A smaller version of the symbol is then shown if the accelerator pedal is depressed for an • • example, wet snow or rain. to the right in the display. The same symbol is extended period. also displayed when Distance Alert is activated, see page 176 . NOTE The radar sensor and its limitations The radar sensor is used by both Adaptive If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for Deactivating and resuming settings Cruise Control and the Collision Warning Sys- Cruise control is deactivated, either with a a short time, such as when passing another vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and tem with Auto-brake. It is designed to detect short press on , or by action taken by the is reactivated when the pedal is released. cars or larger vehicles driving in the same driver, such as braking, etc. The set speed, for direction as your vehicle. example 55 mph, is then shown in parenthe- Automatic deactivation ses. Speed and time interval are resumed by WARNING pressing . Adaptive cruise control is linked to other systems such as ABS, the stability and traction Accessories or other objects, such as extra control system (DSTC), and the Distance Alert headlights, must not be installed in front of WARNING System. If any of these systems are not func- the grille. There may be a significant increase in speed tioning properly, adaptive cruise control is Modification of the radar sensor could make after the button has been pressed. automatically deactivated. its use illegal. In the event of automatic deactivation a signal A short press on in standby mode or a long will sound and the message Cruise control The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles press in active mode deactivates cruise con- Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver ahead is impeded:

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

• if the radar sensor is obstructed and can- lanes between your vehicle and the one not detect other vehicles, for example in that the system has already detected. heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or obscuring the radar sensor. vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected. NOTE In curves, the radar sensor may detect the Keep the area in front of the radar sensor wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle clean. from view.

• if the speed of vehicles ahead is significantly different from your own speed. Fault tracing and actions 04 If the message Radar blocked See manual is WARNING displayed, this means that the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed and that The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. a vehicle ahead cannot be detected. In some situations it may detect a vehicle later than expected or not detect vehicles at This, in turn, means that the functions of the all. ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning System with Auto-brake will not function.

G021414 The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions. Radar sensor field of vision (gray) In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, for example a vehicle that suddenly enters the

Cause Action The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Cause Action Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the radar signals. the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description 04 - Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.

- Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.

- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

- Turn on DSTC to enable ACC cannot be activated until the stability system (DSTC) has been activated. see page 158 for more Cruise information on DSTC.

- Cruise control Cancelled ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.

- Cruise control Unavailable ACC cannot be activated. This may be due to: • high brake temperature • the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Symbol Message Description Radar blocked See manual ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. see page 172 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations..

Cruise control Service ACC is not functioning. required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance alert*

Introduction Distance Alert is active at speeds above Setting a time interval Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). The buttons for setting a time interval are trol and is a function that provides information located on the left side of the steering wheel, about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. WARNING see the illustration on page 171 . Time interval information is only given for a Distance Alert only indicates the distance to Press to increase the interval or to vehicle that is driving ahead of your vehicle, in the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the decrease it. the same lane, and in the same direction. No speed of your vehicle. Five different time intervals information is provided for vehicles driving can be selected and are toward you, moving very slowly, or at a stand- Operation shown in the display as 1–5 still. horizontal bars. The greater 04 the number of bars, the longer the time interval.

No. of bars Approx. time interval (in seconds) 1 1.0

G017362 2 1.4

A smaller section of the red warning light in the 3 1.8 windshield glows steadily if your vehicle is 4 2.2 closer to the vehicle ahead than the set time Press the button in the center instrument interval. panel to switch this function on or off. 5 2.6 > The indicator light in the button illumi- NOTE nates when the function is on. The number of bars indicating the selected Distance Alert is in active mode while Adap- time interval are shown while the setting is tive Cruise Control is active. being made and for several seconds afterward. A smaller version of the symbol is then shown to the right in the display. The same symbol is

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance alert* also displayed when Adaptive Cruise Control is Limitations WARNING activated. The Distance Alert function uses the same radar sensor used by Adaptive Cruise Control • Bad weather or winding roads may NOTE and the Collision Warning system. See page affect the radar sensor’s capacity to detect vehicles ahead. 172 for more information on the radar sensor’s The higher your vehicle’s speed, the • limitations. • The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a greater the distance to the vehicle motorcycle, may also make it difficult to ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a NOTE detect. This may result in the warning given time interval. light illuminating at a shorter distance • The set time interval is also used by Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light than the one that has been set, or that Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 171. contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the the light will not come on at all. driver is not looking straight ahead may 04 make the visual warning signal in the wind- WARNING shield difficult to see. Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions.

Symbol Message Description - Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance alert*

Symbol Message Description Radar blocked See manual Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See page 172 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto-brake is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and required qualified Volvo service technician.

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Introduction Driver Alert Control (DAC)–general DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang- The Driver Alert System is designed to help a information ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be driver who may be becoming fatigued or who used on main roads and is not meant for use in is inadvertently leaving the lane. city traffic.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- WARNING ent functions that can be switched on together or separately. • DAC is not intended to extend the duration of driving. Always plan breaks at Driver Alert Control (DAC) • regular intervals to help remain alert. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) • • In certain cases, fatigue may not affect When one or both of the functions has been the driver’s behavior. In situations of 04 switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti- this type, no warning will be provided. vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of Therefore, it is important to take breaks 40 mph (65 km/h). G017332 at regular intervals, regardless of whether or not DAC has given a warn- The function deactivates if speed goes under This function is intended to alert the driver if ing. 37 mph (60 km/h). his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the driver is distracted or fatigued. Both functions use a camera that is dependent Limitations on the road/lane being clearly marked by pain- NOTE In certain situations, DAC may provide warn- ted lines on each side. ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not The camera has certain limitations, see become erratic. WARNING page 165. • if the driver is testing the LDW function The Driver Alert system does not function in all situations and is designed to be a sup- A camera monitors the painted lines marking • in strong crosswinds plementary aid. It is not, however, intended the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and • on grooved road surfaces. to replace the driver’s attention and judge- compares the direction of the road with the ment. driver’s movements of the steering wheel. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the lane smoothly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Operating DAC Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the Certain settings can be made from the menu Alert is displayed. The second line shows driver will be alerted by an audible signal and system controlled from the center instrument the alternative Off, Unavailable, or the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is panel, see page 124 for more information on [-----], i.e., the number of bars. displayed. The warning will be repeated after a short time if the driving pattern remains the the menu system. READbutton. Confirms and erases a mes- same. The current system status can be checked on sage in the display. the trip computer’s display by using the but- Activating DAC WARNING tons on the left steering wheel lever. In the center instrument panel, go to Car • An alert should be taken seriously since settings and select Driver Alert on. it is sometimes difficult for a driver to 04 The function is activated when the realize that he/she is fatigued. vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph • In the event of a warning or if the driver (65 km/h). The display will show level feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible markings of 1–5 bars, where a low in a safe place and rest. number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description - Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

- Driver Alert Unavailable The vehicle’s speed is below 37 mph (60 km/h) or the road lacks clear marking lines.

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Symbol Message Description Driver Alert [-----] The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a low number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message. break

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area blocked of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 165 for information on the camera’s limitations. 04

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message required remains in the display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)– Operation and function If the camera can no longer monitor the road’s general information side marker lines, or if the vehicle’s speed falls below 37 mph (60 km/h), LDW will return to standby mode and Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be displayed. If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’s left or right side marker lines, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal. No warning signal will be given in the following situations: 04 • The turn signal is being used • The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1 LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the • The throttle pedal is pressed quickly This function is designed to help reduce the button on the center console. A light in the but- • If the steering wheel is moved quickly risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle ton illuminates when the function is on. In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off • The trip computer display shows Lane Depart body to sway. the road or into the opposite lane. LDW con- Warn Available when the function is in sists of a camera that monitors the lane’s side See page 165 for information on the camera’s standby mode. marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible limitations. signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line When LDW is in standby mode, the function is or the road’s center dividing line. activated automatically after the camera has WARNING monitored the road’s side marker lines and the The driver will only be warned once for each vehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h). time the wheels cross a marker line. No Lane Depart Warn Available will be dis- alarm will be given if a marker line is played. between the wheels.

1 A warning will be given even when Increased sensitivity has been selected.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description Lane departure warning ON/Lane The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds. departure warning OFF

- Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

- Lane Depart Warn Unavailable Speed is below 37 mph (60 km/h) or if the road lacks clear marker lines.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean 04 the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 165 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

Settings mode that it was in when the engine was Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be switched off. made in the menu system under Car settings Increased sensitivity: This selection increa- Lane departure warning. See page ses the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be 124 for more information on the menu system. given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations On at start-up: This selection puts the func- apply. tion in standby mode each time the engine is started. Otherwise, the system will be in the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

Introduction Function Activating/deactivating The park assist system is designed to assist The system is activated automatically when the you when driving into parking spaces, garages, vehicle is started. etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located Press the Park assist button on the center in one or both bumpers to measure the dis- console to temporarily deactivate the sys- tance to a vehicle, object, or a person who may tem(s). be close to the front or rear of your vehicle. > The indicator light in the button will go This system is available in the rear bumper out when the system has been deacti- only, or in both the front and rear bumpers. vated. Park assist utilizes four ultrasound sensors in Park assist will be automatically reactivated the 04 the bumper(s) to measure the distance to a next time the engine is started, or if the button vehicle, object, or a person who may be close is pressed (the indicator light in the button will to the front or rear of your vehicle. An audible Park assist button illuminate). signal and symbols in the audio system’s dis- The system is activated automatically when the play indicate the distance to the object vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but- NOTE ton in the center console illuminates when the WARNING • Front park assist is disengaged auto- system is on. matically when the parking brake is Park Assist is an information system, NOT a • The front park assist system is active from applied. safety system. This system is designed to If the vehicle is equipped with front and be a supplementary aid when parking the the time the engine is started until the vehi- • vehicle. It is not, however, intended to cle exceeds a speed of approximately rear park assist, both systems will be replace the driver's attention and judge- 10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the deactivated by pressing the button. ment. vehicle is backing up. • Rear park assist is active when the engine is running and reverse gear has been selected.

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

Signals from the park assist system Display in a vehicle with both front and rear Rear park assist park assist. Reverse gear is selected and no 1 objects have been detected in front of or behind the vehicle. Active Audible signal 2 The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to an Active object, and becomes constant when you are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object 3 in front of or behind the vehicle (example 2 in the illustration). If there are objects within this 04 Active distance both behind and in front of the vehicle, G021423 Views in the display the tone alternates between front and rear speakers. The distance monitored behind the vehicle is Visual indicator approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal If the volume of another source from the audio comes from the rear speakers. The audio system’s display gives an overview system is high, this will be automatically low- of the vehicle’s position in relation to a ered. The system must be deactivated when towing detected object. a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted The markers in the display indicate that one or carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park more of the four sensors has detected an assist system's sensors. object. The greater the number of markers, the closer the vehicle is to the object. NOTE Display in a vehicle with rear park assist Rear park assist is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine only. Here, an object has been detected by trailer wiring is used. both of the right rear sensors. Display in a vehicle with both front and rear park assist. The solid marker in this example indicates that an object is closer than approximately 1 foot (30 cm) to the right front sensor.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

Front park assist CAUTION In certain circumstances, the park assist system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include such things as the horns of other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does not indicate a fault in the system.

04 G021425

G021424 Cleaning the sensors Location of the rear sensors. The distance monitored in front of the vehicle The sensors must be cleaned regularly to is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig- ensure that they work properly. Clean them nal comes from the audio system's front with water and a suitable car washing deter- speakers. gent. It may not be possible to combine auxiliary Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause headlights and front park assist since these incorrect warning signals. lights could trigger the system's sensors. NOTE Faults in the system If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, If the information symbol illuminates and Park snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system. assist syst Service required is shown on the Location of the front sensors. information display, this indicates that the system is not functioning properly and has been disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

Introduction WARNING NOTE • BLIS is an information system, NOT a The door panel indicator light illuminates on warning or safety system. the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is • BLIS does not eliminate the need for passed on both sides at the same time, both you to visually confirm the conditions lights will illuminate. around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes. BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the driver if a fault should occur with the system. As the driver, you have full responsibility • For example, if one or both of the system's for changing lanes in a safe manner. cameras are obscured, a message (see the 04

G021426 table on page 189) will appear in the informa- The system is based on digital camera tech- tion display in the instrument panel. If this BLIS camera nology. The cameras are located beneath the occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, side-view mirrors. the system can be temporarily switched off (for Indicator light When one (or both) of the cameras have instructions, see page 189). BLIS symbol detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft. information system that indicates the presence (9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see of another vehicle moving in the same direction the illustration, the indicator light in the door as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind panel illuminates. The light will glow continu- area." ously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the blind area. CAUTION The BLIS system should only be repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. G021427 Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

When does BLIS function Darkness NOTE The system functions when your vehicle is BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa- moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). sionally even when there are no other vehi- vehicle in the blind area must have its head- cles in the blind area, this does not indicate When you pass another vehicle: lights on. This means, for example, that the a fault in the system. The system reacts when you pass another system will not detect a trailer without head- vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) lights that is being towed behind a car or truck. In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst. faster than that vehicle. Service required will be displayed. When you are passed by another vehicle: WARNING The following are several examples of situa- The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by • BLIS does not react to cyclists or tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph 04 mopeds. illuminate even when there are no other vehi- (70 km/h) faster than your vehicle. • BLIS does not react to vehicles that are cles in the area monitored by the system. standing still. WARNING • The BLIS cameras have the same limi- • BLIS does not function in sharp curves. tation as the human eye. In other words, • BLIS does not function when your vehi- their "vision is impaired" by adverse cle is backing up. weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, intense light directly into the If you are towing a wide trailer, this may • camera, dense fog, etc. prevent the BLIS cameras from detect- ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes. Limitations In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) How BLIS functions in daylight and Light reflected from a wet road surface may illuminate even when there are no other darkness vehicles in the area monitored by the system. Daylight BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses, motorcycles, etc.

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

CAUTION switched off, and a text message is displayed. Clean the lenses carefully to avoid • BLIS can be switched on again by pressing scratching. • the button. The indicator light in the button • The lenses are electrically heated to will illuminate and a new text message will help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen- be displayed. Press the READ button (see tly brush away snow from the lenses. page 126) to erase the message. BLIS system messages The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light, Switching BLIS on and off Text in the dis- System status smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on play a highway 04 Blind spot syst. BLIS not functioning Service required properly. Contact an authorized Volvo service technician.

Blind spot syst. BLIS camera Camera blocked obscured. Clean the lenses.

Blind-spot info BLIS system on Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low system ON on the horizon BLIS is automatically activated when the igni- Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses tion is switched on. The indicator lights will In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera provide confirmation by flashing 3 times. lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped • The system can be switched off by press- clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge. ing the BLIS button in the center console (see the illustration). The indicator light in the button goes out when the system is

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

Text in the dis- System status play Blind-spot info BLIS system off system OFF

Blind spot syst. The BLIS cameras' Reduced function function has been reduced due to weak or impaired data transfer 04 between the BLIS system's cameras and the vehicle's electrical system. The cameras will reset themselves when this data transfer has returned to normal.

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Storage spaces

04 G024158

191 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Compartment in door panel Tunnel console Glove compartment Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions Glove compartment Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and AUX input Jacket holder Rear seat cup holders 04 Storage pocket G021436 Jacket holder Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under The jacket hanger is located on the inboard The owner's manual and maps can be kept armrest. side of the front passenger's seat head here. There are also holders for pens and fuel restraint. It is only intended for hanging light Includes cup holder for driver and passen- cards. The glove compartment can be locked garments. ger, 12 V socket and small storage com- manually with the key blade, see page 65. partment.

192 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Vanity mirror 12-volt sockets socket to supply current, the ignition must be in at least mode I, see page 82. The auxiliary socket can also be used to power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING Always keep the sockets covered when not in use. 04 G021438 G021439

Vanity mirror with lighting 12-volt socket in the front tunnel console The light comes on automatically when the cover is lifted. G021440

12-volt socket in the rear center console The electrical socket can be used for 12-volt accessories such as cell phone chargers and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For the

193 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience–S80 Executive

Refrigerator Carpet in the trunk Glasses

04 G021857 G021858 G021859

The refrigerator is located behind the rear cen- If the vehicle is equipped with a refrigerator, the There is a storage compartment under the ter armrest and has a volume of 12.2 qts. rear seat backrests must be folded down cover in the rear center armrest for two glasses (11.5 liters). It functions when the engine is run- slightly before the carpet on the floor of the and a bottle opener. ning or when the ignition is in mode II trunk can be removed, see page 87. WARNING WARNING Keep the glasses in their storage compart- Bottles kept in the refrigerator should be ment when not in use or in the cup holders firmly sealed and the refrigerator's door provided. The cover on the armrest should must be securely closed while the vehicle is be closed when the vehicle is in motion. in motion.

NOTE The refrigerator requires free air circulation in order to function at its best. At least 2 inches (5 cm) of free space should be left around the refrigerator's air intake in the trunk.

194 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

195 Driving recommendations...... 198 Refueling...... 202 Loading...... 206 Towing a trailer...... 209 Emergency towing...... 211

196 DURING YOUR TRIP 05 05 During your trip

Driving recommendations

General information • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or WARNING ice has ended. Economical driving conserves natural Driving with the trunk open: Driving with • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, the trunk open could lead to poisonous resources increase air resistance and also fuel con- Better driving economy may be obtained by exhaust gases entering the passenger com- sumption. partment. If the trunk must be kept open for thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops At highway driving speeds, fuel consump- any reason, proceed as follows: and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to • tion will be lower with the air conditioning • Close the windows immediate traffic conditions. on and the windows closed than with the Set the ventilation system control to air Observe the following rules: air conditioning off and the windows open. • flow to floor, windshield and side win- • Bring the engine to normal operating tem- • Using the onboard trip computer's fuel dows and the blower control to its high- perature as soon as possible by driving consumption modes can help you learn est setting. with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for how to drive more economically. the first few minutes of operation. A cold Other factors that decrease gas mileage Weight distribution affects handling engine uses more fuel and is subject to are: increased wear. At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a 05 • Dirty air cleaner tendency to understeer, which means that the • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle steering wheel has to be turned more than for driving short distances. This does not • Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter might seem appropriate for the curvature of a allow the engine to reach normal operating Dragging brakes • bend. This ensures good stability and reduces temperature. • Incorrect front end alignment the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that • Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration Some of the above mentioned items and others these properties can alter with the vehicle load. and hard braking. are checked at the standard maintenance The heavier the load in the trunk, the less the • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position intervals. tendency to understeer. as often as possible and avoid using kick- down. Handling, roadholding • Do not exceed posted speed limits. Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check • Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra that the tires are inflated to the recommended load) in the vehicle. pressure according to the vehicle load. See the • Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire "Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis- pressure regularly (when tires are cold). tributed so that capacity weight or maximum permissible axle loads are not exceeded.

198 05 During your trip

Driving recommendations

Driving through water CAUTION WARNING • The vehicle can be driven through water up to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm), • Engine damage will occur if water is The cooling fan may start or continue to at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). drawn into the air cleaner. operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off. • Take particular care when driving through • If the vehicle is driven through water flowing water. deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may enter the differential and the transmis- • Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of • Clean the electrical connections for trailer sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating the grille when driving in hot weather con- wiring after driving in mud or water. capacity and may shorten the service ditions. • When driving through water, maintain low life of these components. • Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm speed and do not stop in the water. • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil water up to the door sills longer than temperature could become too high. WARNING absolutely necessary. This could result in electrical malfunctions. Conserving electrical current After driving through water, press lightly on Keep the following in mind to help minimize the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes If the engine has been stopped while the • battery drain: are functioning normally. Water or mud can vehicle is in water, do not attempt to 05 make the brake linings slippery, resulting in restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of • When the engine is not running, avoid delayed braking effect. the water. using ignition mode II. Many electrical systems (the audio system, the optional navigation system, power windows, etc) will Engine and cooling system function in ignition modes 0 and I. These Under special conditions, for example when modes reduce drain on the battery. driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and • Please keep in mind that using systems, cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol- accessories, etc., that consume a great deal of current when the engine is not run- lows to avoid overheating the engine. ning could result in the battery being com- • Maintain a low speed when driving with a pletely drained. Driving or having the trailer up long, steep hills. engine running for approximately • Do not turn the engine off immediately 15 minutes will help keep the battery when stopping after a hard drive. charged.

199 05 During your trip

Driving recommendations

Before a long distance trip • Consider your destination. If you will be NOTE It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle driving through an area where snow or ice checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- are likely to occur, consider snow tires. Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance inter- ice technician before driving long distances. Cold weather precautions vals except at owner request and at addi- Your retailer will also be able to supply you with If you wish to check your vehicle before the tional charge. bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for approach of cold weather, the following advice your use in the event that problems occur. is worth noting: • The load placed on the battery is greater As a minimum, the following items should be during the winter since the windshield wip- Make sure that the engine coolant contains checked before any long trip: • ers, lighting, etc. are used more often. 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture Moreover, the capacity of the battery • Check that engine runs smoothly and that will reduce freeze protection. This gives decreases as the temperature drops. In fuel consumption is normal. protection against freezing down to very cold weather, a poorly charged bat- –31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" anti- • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there- freeze is not approved by Volvo. Different fore advisable to check the state of charge • Have the transmission oil level checked. types of antifreeze must not be mixed. • Check condition of drive belts. more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil 05 • Volvo recommends using only genuine on the battery posts. • Check state of the battery's charge. Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires • Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this on all four wheels for winter driving, see well), and replace those that are worn. helps prevent the formation of condensa- page 256. Check tire pressures. tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to • • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and freezing, add washer solvents containing add fuel line de-icer before refueling. steering gear should be checked by a antifreeze. This is important since dirt is trained and qualified Volvo service techni- • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. often splashed on the windshield during cian only. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves winter driving, requiring the frequent use of • Check all lights, including high beams. cold-weather starting as well as decreas- the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer ing fuel consumption while the engine is Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down • Reflective warning triangles are legally warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par- required in some states/provinces. to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and ticularly the synthetic type, is recom- 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part • Have a word with a trained and qualified mended. Be sure to use good quality oil but washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to Volvo service technician if you intend to do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving 0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and drive in countries where it may be difficult or in warm weather, see page 277 for more to obtain the correct fuel. information on engine oil.

200 05 During your trip

Driving recommendations

2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 1 part water. • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. • Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can cause damage to the locks.

201 05 During your trip

Refueling

Fuel requirements ness of the emission control system and could sonal air quality standards, some areas require result in loss of emission warranty coverage. the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Deposit control gasoline (detergent State and local vehicle inspection programs Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen- additives) will make detection of misfueling easier, pos- ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis- on page 203 must still be met. oline to control engine deposits. Detergent fueled vehicles. gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and Alcohol – Ethanol intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit NOTE Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume control gasolines will help ensure good driva- may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". an octane enhancing additive called methyl- whether the gasoline contains deposit control cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to additives, check with the service station oper- (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission 15% MTBE may be used. ator. Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc- Methanol NOTE tion indicator light) located on your instru- Do not use gasolines containing methanol 05 ment panel may light. If this occurs, please (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice Volvo does not recommend the use of exter- return your vehicle to a trained and qualified nal fuel injector cleaning systems. Volvo service technician for service. can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered under Unleaded fuel Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter "Oxygenated fuels" and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv- "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA- ethers. In some areas, state or local laws DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which require that the service pump be marked indi- fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis- cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled there are areas in which the pumps are "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is damages the three-way catalytic converter and alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated with the service station operator. To meet sea- use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

202 05 During your trip

Refueling

Octane rating change gasoline brands to fully utilize your Use of Additives engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos- With the exception of gas line antifreeze during Minimum octane sible operation. winter months, do not add solvents, thicken- ers, or other store-bought additives to your NOTE vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may damage your engine, and some When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- of these additives contain organically volatile sary to fill the tank more than once before a chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself difference in engine operation is noticeable. to these chemicals.

Fuel Formulations WARNING Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a Never carry a cell phone that is switched knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone G028920 Besides damaging the exhaust emission con- rings, this may cause a spark that could trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and Typical pump octane label injury. 05 strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane1 or above will Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. WARNING not affect engine reliability. Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated where you must fill your own gas tank, take and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust horsepower, torque, and fuel economy per- precautions. These may include: gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes formance using premium 91 octane fuel. inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger • standing upwind away from the filler nozzle compartment is ventilated, and immediately Demanding driving while refueling return the vehicle to a trained and qualified In demanding driving conditions, such as oper- • refueling only at gas stations with vapor Volvo service technician for correction. ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, recovery systems that fully seal the mouth or driving for extended periods at higher alti- of the filler neck during refueling tudes than normal, it may be advisable to • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to fuel filler nozzle.

1 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

203 05 During your trip

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler door • Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened and is completely closed after refueling. manually: • Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot 1. Open the side hatch in the trunk (on the weather. same side as the fuel filler door). Close the fuel filler door by pressing it a click 2. Grasp the green cord with a handle. indicates that it is closed. 3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until CAUTION the fuel filler door clicks open.

• Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. Opening/closing the fuel cap In addition to causing damage to the environment, gasolines containing

G022914 alcohol can cause damage to painted surfaces, which may not be covered The fuel filler door is located on the right rear under the New Vehicle Limited War- ranty. 05 fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel tank symbol on the information display ) Manually opening the fuel filler door With the ignition switched off, press the button on the lighting panel to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will

remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to G022915 move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks. Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the • If you intend to leave your vehicle while it filler cap slowly. is being refueled, this feature enables you After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn- to lock the doors/trunk while leaving the ing it clockwise until it clicks into place. fuel filler door unlocked. You can also keep the vehicle locked if you • G024631 remain inside it during refueling. The central locking button does not lock the fuel filler door.

204 05 During your trip

Refueling

CAUTION avoid malfunctions that could damage the Heated oxygen sensors three-way catalytic converter. The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy- 2 • Do not refuel with the engine running . • Do not park your vehicle over combustible gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the materials, such as grass or leaves, which are fed into a control module that continuously ignition is on, an incorrect reading could can come into contact with the hot exhaust monitors engine functions and controls fuel occur in the fuel gauge. system and cause such materials to ignite injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine • Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not under certain wind and weather condi- is continuously adjusted for efficient combus- press the handle on the filler nozzle tions. tion to help reduce harmful emissions. more than one extra time. Too much fuel • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of in the tank in hot weather conditions can one minute), or an intermittently firing or cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling flooded engine can cause three-way cata- could also cause damage to the emis- lytic converter or exhaust system over- sion control systems. heating. • Remember that tampering or unauthorized Emission controls modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille- 05 Three-way catalytic converter gal and can cause three-way catalytic con- • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain verter or exhaust system overheating. This engine malfunctions, particularly involving includes: altering fuel injection settings or the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition components, altering emission system systems, may cause unusually high three- components or location or removing com- way catalytic converter temperatures. Do ponents, and/or repeated use of leaded not continue to operate your vehicle if you fuel. detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating condi- NOTE tions, such as engine overheating or back- firing. A properly tuned engine will help Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters.

2 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

205 05 During your trip

Introduction WARNING Load anchoring eyelets The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is Stop the engine, put the gear selector in determined by factors such as the number of • P, and apply the parking brake when passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight loading or unloading long objects. of any accessories that may be installed, etc. • The vehicle's driving characteristics To increase loading space, the rear seat backr- may change depending on the weight ests can be folded down, See page 87. and distribution of the load. When loading the trunk, keep the following in • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a mind: force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a headon collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). The trunk lid can be unlocked an pop- • The rear seat should not be loaded to a

ped open slightly via the button G021462 located on the lighting panel, see page 66. level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. • Load objects in the trunk against the back- Objects placed higher than this level The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the 05 rest whenever possible. could impede the function of the Volvo vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help • Unstable loads can be secured to the load Inflatable Curtain. anchor items in the trunk. anchoring eyelets with straps or web lash- ings to help keep them from shifting. • Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. The gear selector can be knocked out of position by long loads, which could set the vehicle in motion.

206 05 During your trip

WARNING The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags in place. • Cover sharp edges on long loads to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the 1. Open the hatch in the floor of the trunk. load to help prevent shifting during sud- 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap. den stops. • Always secure large and heavy objects Ski hatch with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. • Always secure the load to help prevent it from moving in the event of sudden There is a hatch in the right section of the rear stops. seat backrest that can be opened for transportation. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P Fold the right backrest forward. when loading and unloading the vehicle. Release the hatch in the rear seat backrest 05 by sliding the catch up while folding the Grocery bag holder* hatch forward. Return the backrest to the upright position with the hatch open. Use the seat belt to prevent the load from moving. G021463

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the trunk

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207 05 During your trip

WARNING Roof loads • The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel consumption will increase with the size of the • Always secure the load to help prevent Using load carriers load. it from moving in the event of sudden Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso- Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast braking. • ries. Observe the following points when in use: cornering and hard braking. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking • To avoid damaging your vehicle and to brake and put the gear selector in P achieve maximum safety when driving, we when loading and unloading the vehicle. recommend using the load carriers that Volvo has developed especially for your NOTE vehicle. • Volvo-approved removable roof racks are If the vehicle is equipped with the optional designed to carry the maximum allowable integrated booster cushion, fold it out first. roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg). For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man- The cover on the rear seat armrest/child seat ufacturer's weight limits for the rack. 05 has no hinge. The cover must be removed • Never exceed the rack manufacturer's before the ski hatch is used. weigh limits and never exceed the maxi- Removal: mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg). Open the cover 30 degrees and lift straight • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads evenly. up. • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the Installation: load. Insert the cover in the grooves behind the • Secure the cargo correctly with appropri- upholstery and close the cover. ate tie-down equipment. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. • Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity and handling change when you carry a load on the roof.

208 05 During your trip

Towing a trailer

Introduction when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. WARNING Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer Use a lower gear and turn off the air con- Bumper-attached trailer hitches must hitches that are specially designed for the vehi- ditioner if the temperature gauge needle • not be used on Volvos, nor should cle. enters the red range. safety chains be attached to the If the automatic transmission begins to • bumper. NOTE overheat, a message will be displayed in the text window. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle See page 275 for the maximum trailer and rear axle must not be used. Avoid overload and other abusive opera- tongue weights recommended by Volvo. • tion. • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to the vehicle Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- Observe the legal requirements of the • brake system, nor a trailer's lighting • ity, and economy. state/province in which the vehicles are system directly to the vehicle lighting It is necessary to balance trailer brakes All Volvo models are equipped with • system. Consult your nearest author- • with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump- ized Volvo retailer for correct installa- safe stop (check and observe state/local ers. Trailer hitch installation should not tion. regulations). interfere with the proper operation of this • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety 05 bumper system. • Do not connect the trailer's brake system wire must be correctly fastened to the directly to the vehicle's brake system. Trailer towing does not normally present any hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch particular problems, but take into considera- • More frequent vehicle maintenance is on the vehicle. The safety wire should tion: required. never be fastened to or wound around the drawbar ball. Remove the ball and drawbar assembly Increase tire pressure to recommended • • when the hitch is not being used. full. See the tire inflation tables on pages 251 and 251. • Volvo recommends the use of synthetic engine oil when towing a trailer over long When your vehicle is new, avoid towing • distances or in mountainous areas. heavy trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km). • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h). • Engine and transmission are subject to increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely watched

209 05 During your trip

Towing a trailer

NOTE Detachable trailer hitch (accessory) 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder. • When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill, apply the parking brake before 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end putting the gear selector in P. Always of the locking bolt. follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking. Removing the ball holder 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt C • When starting on a hill, put the gear and slide the locking bolt out of the ball selector in D before releasing the park- holder/hitch assembly. ing brake. See also page 119 for more detailed information about starting off D 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem- E on a hill while towing a trailer. B bly.

• If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift A G010496 positions while towing a trailer, make NOTE Ball holder sure the gear you select does not put A cover for the hitch assembly is also too much strain on the engine (using too 05 Locking bolt included in the kit. high a gear). • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may Cotter pin be rated for trailers heavier than the Hitch assembly vehicle is designed to tow. Please adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer Safety wire attachment weights. • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of Installing the ball holder more than 15 %. 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt Trailer cable out of the hitch assembly. An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem- hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has bly. 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on in the hitch assembly. the ground.

210 05 During your trip

Emergency towing

Towing eyelet CAUTION After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet should be removed and returned to its storage If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed location. truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed. Press the cover for the attachment point back into position. NOTE WARNING On certain models equipped with a trailer hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed • Remember that the power brakes and G021500 into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing power steering will not function when rope should be attached to the trailer hitch engine is not running. The braking and instead. For this reason, the detachable steering systems will function but con- section of the trailer hitch should be safely siderably higher pressure will be stowed in the vehicle at all times. required on the brake pedal and greater steering effort must be exerted. Attaching the towing eyelet • The towing eyelets must not be used for 05 Use a coin to pry open the lower edge of pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for the cover. any similar purpose involving severe strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow Attaching the towing eyelet hand and then using the tire iron until it is truck. securely in place. The towing eyelet is located under the floor of Precautions when the vehicle is in tow the trunk, with the spare tire. This eyelet must WARNING be screwed into the positions provided on the • The steering wheel must be unlocked. The right sides of either the front or rear bumper Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the remote key must be in the ignition slot1. vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck. (see illustration). • Attach jumper cables (see page 111) to provide current for releasing the optional electric parking brake and to move the gear selector from the P position.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the passenger compartment.

211 05 During your trip

Emergency towing

• The gear selector must be in position N. CAUTION please refer to the towing information on Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not page 211. • Please check with state and local exceed the maximum allowable towing • authorities before attempting this type speed. CAUTION of towing, as vehicles being towed are • Maximum distance with front wheels on subject to regulations regarding maxi- • Sling-type equipment applied at the ground: 50 miles (80 km). mum towing speed, length and type of front will damage radiator and air con- • While the vehicle is being towed, try to towing device, lighting, etc. ditioning lines. keep the tow rope taut at all times. • If the vehicle's battery is dead, do not • It is equally important not to use sling- • The vehicle should only be towed in the attempt to start the vehicle by pushing type equipment at the rear or apply lift- forward direction. or pulling it as this will damage the ing equipment inside the rear wheels; three-way catalytic converter(s). The serious damage to the rear axle may NOTE engine must be jump started using an result. auxiliary battery (see page 111). • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed During towing, ignition mode II should be If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck, the towing eyelets must not be used so that the lighting can be switched on. • 05 truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to secure the vehicle on the flat used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator. CAUTION bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator. Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with the front wheels off the ground should not be towed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) or Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/ for distances longer than 30 miles (50 km). All Wheel Drive Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equipment. • If wheel lift equipment must be used, please use extreme caution to help avoid damage to the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle should be towed with the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible. • If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground,

212 05 During your trip

213 214 ov rgas...... 281 Volvo programs...... 274 Specifications...... Label information 267 Vehicle care...... Wheels andtires 237 Fuses...... 234 Battery...... 232 Wiper bladesandwasherfluid...... Replacing bulbs 222 Fluids...... 220 Engine oil...... Hood andengine Maintaining yourcar 216 Volvo maintenance...... 224 ...... 246 ...... 272 ...... compartment...... 217 ...... 219

G020922 MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS 06 06 Maintenance and specifications

Volvo maintenance

Introduction recommended that receipts for vehicle emis- prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance sion maintenance be retained in case ques- to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main- program outlined in the Warranty and Service tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec- tenance. The schedule includes components Records Information booklet. This mainte- tion and maintenance should also be per- that affect vehicle emissions. This page nance program contains inspections and serv- formed anytime a malfunction is observed or describes some of the emission-related com- ices necessary for the proper function of your suspected. ponents. vehicle. The maintenance services contain Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada several checks that require special tools and In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- training, and therefore must be performed by a dian regulations, the following list of warranties qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top is provided. condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. • New Vehicle Limited Warranty • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty manufacturers to furnish written instructions to • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys- the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper tems Limited Warranty servicing and function of the components that • Emission Design and Defect Warranty control emissions. These services, which are Emission Performance Warranty listed in the "Warranty and Service Records • 06 Information" booklet, are not covered by the These are the federal warranties; other warran- warranty. You will be required to pay for labor ties are provided as required by state/provin- and material used. cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for Maintenance detailed information concerning each of the Your Volvo passed several major inspections warranties. before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance Periodic maintenance helps minimize procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv- emissions ice Records Information booklet, many of Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi- which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- cle running well. Your Warranty and Service sions, should be performed as indicated. It is Records Information booklet provides a com-

216 06 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

Owner maintenance As needed: They are specially reinforced to bear the weight Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup under the front of the engine support frame. and Service Records Information booklet. of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt Take care not to damage the splash guard residues. under the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi- The following points can be carried out tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at between the normally scheduled maintenance Always use axle stands or similar structures. services. the base of the windshield, and from other places where they may collect. If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the Each time the car is refueled: front and rear lift arm pads should be centered • Check the engine oil level. NOTE under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, edge of the sill rail (see illustration). • Complete service information for qualified headlights, and tail lights. technicians is available online for purchase or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. Emission inspection readiness Monthly: • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect What is an Onboard Diagnostic System the tires for wear. Hoisting the vehicle (OBD II)? • Check that engine coolant and other fluid OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized levels are between the indicated "min" and engine management system. It stores diagnos- "max" markings. tic information about your vehicle's emission • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass controls. It can light the Check Engine light 06 cleaner and soft paper towels. (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A • Wipe driver information displays with a soft "fault" is a component or system that is not cloth. performing within an expected range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- • store a message about any fault. rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end How do states use OBD II for emission of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo inspections? retailer for additional information. Many states connect a computer directly to a If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can two jack attachments points should be used. then read "faults." In some states, this type of

217 06 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission way driving is typically needed to allow test. OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more infor- How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission mation on planning a trip. inspection? • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- your vehicle's maintenance schedule. tion for any of the following reasons. • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your vehicle may fail inspection. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area. • If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection. 06 How can I prepare for my next OBD II emission inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was lit but went out without service, have your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. • If you recently had service for a lit Check Engine light, or if you had service that required disconnecting the battery, a period of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-

218 06 Maintenance and specifications

Hood and engine compartment

Opening and closing the hood Engine compartment, overview WARNING The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off.

WARNING The ignition should always be completely switched off before performing any opera- tions in the engine compartment. The distributor ignition system operates at very high voltages. Special safety precau- G018945 tions must be followed to prevent injury. Always turn the ignition off when: The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine model. • Replacing distributor ignition components e.g. plugs, coil, etc. Coolant expansion tank • Do not touch any part of the distributor Power steering fluid reservoir ignition system while the engine is run- G010951 ning. This may result in unintended Engine oil dipstick movements and body injury. 06 Pull the lever located under the left side of Radiator the dash to release the hood lock. Lift the hood slightly. Press the release Filler cap for engine oil control (located under the right front edge Cover over brake fluid reservoir of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood Battery WARNING Relay and fuse box Check that the hood locks properly when closed. Washer fluid reservoir Air cleaner

219 06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil Checking and adding oil The oil level should be checked at regular intervals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service. • See page 277 for oil specifications. • Refer to the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for information on the oil change intervals. Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. G021737 CAUTION G021734 The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX Not checking the oil level regularly can • Location of the filler cap and dipstick marks on the dipstick result in serious engine damage if the oil level becomes too low. Checking the oil NOTE 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint- Oil that is lower than the specified qual- • free rag. ity can damage the engine. Before checking the oil: • Volvo does not recommend the use of • The car should be parked on a level sur- 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check oil additives. face when the oil is checked. the oil level. The level must be between the 06 MIN and MAX marks. • Always add oil of the same type and • If the engine is warm, wait for at least viscosity as already used. 10 – 15 minutes after the engine has 3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to been switched off before checking the • Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This the MIN mark, add approximately oil. could cause an increase in oil consump- 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil. tion. 4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.

220 06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

NOTE Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.

221 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

Coolant CAUTION WARNING • If necessary, top up the cooling system • Never remove the radiator cap while the with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti- cools. freeze). • If it is necessary to top off the coolant • Different types of antifreeze/coolant when the engine is warm, unscrew the may not be mixed. expansion tank cap slowly so that the • If the cooling system is drained, it overpressure dissipates. should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/anti- Brake fluid freeze. Location of the coolant reservoir • The cooling system must always be kept filled to the correct level, and the Normally, the coolant does not need to be level must be between the MIN and changed. If the system must be drained, con- MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- can be high local temperatures in the nician. engine which could result in damage. Check coolant regularly! 06 See page 279 for information on cooling system capacities. • Do not top up with water only. This reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it Location of the brake fluid reservoir should freeze. Checking the level • Do not use chlorinated tap water in the The fluid reservoir is concealed under the vehicle's cooling system. round cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be accessed.

222 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

The brake fluid should always be between the Filling WARNING MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res- 1. Turn and open the cover. ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, that If a problem should occur in the power 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. steering system or if the vehicle has no elec- The level must be between the MIN and trical current and must be towed, it is still Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F MAX marks. possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep in mind that greater effort will be required to (280 °C), P/N 9437433 turn the steering wheel. Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord- Power steering fluid ing to the intervals specified in the Warranty CAUTION and Service Records Information booklet. Keep the area around the power steering When driving under extremely hard conditions fluid reservoir clean when checking. (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark 06 in the reservoir or if a brake-related Check the level frequently. The fluid does not message is shown in the information require changing. The fluid level must be display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci- towed to a trained and qualified Volvo ties and recommended fluid grade, see service technician and have the brake page 279. system inspected. • Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any other type of brake fluid.

223 06 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

Introduction WARNING WARNING All bulb specifications are listed on page 230. Active Bending Lights* – due to the high The engine should not be running when The following bulbs should only be replaced by • • voltage used by these headlights, these changing bulbs. a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- bulbs should only be replaced by a cian: • When changing in the headlight hous- trained and qualified Volvo service tech- ing, if the engine has been running just • Dome lighting nician. prior to replacing bulbs, please be • Reading lights • Turn off the lights and remove the aware that components in the engine • Glove compartment lighting remote key from the ignition before compartment will be hot. changing any bulbs. • Turn signals in the door mirror The entire headlight housing must be lifted out Approach lighting in the door mirror • when replacing all front bulbs (except for the Headlight housing • Brake/fog/taillights fog lights). • Rear side parking lights • Active Bending Lights and LED bulbs CAUTION Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin- NOTE gers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit For information regarding any other bulbs on the reflector, which will damage it. not mentioned in this section, please con- 06 tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and authorized Volvo service technician.

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

NOTE Unplug the wiring connector by holding Removing the cover to access the down the clip with your thumb. headlights and parking lights • Always switch off the ignition before starting to replace a bulb. Pull out the connector with the other • The optional Active Bending Light bulbs hand. contain trace amounts of mercury. 4. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft These bulbs should always be disposed surface to avoid scratching the lens. of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 5. Replace the defective bulb(s). Reinserting the headlight housing Removing the headlight housing 1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into 1. Switch off the ignition by pressing quickly place. on the START/STOP ENGINE button and remove the remote key from the ignition 2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking G021745 slot1. pins. Check that they are correctly inserted. The headlight housing must be 2. (Upper illustration under "Headlight hous- properly inserted and secured in place NOTE ing") before the lighting is switched on or the Before starting to replace a bulb, see Withdraw the headlight housing's lock- remote key is inserted into the ignition slot. page 224. ing pins. 3. Check that the lights function properly. 06 1. Open the retaining clamp by pressing it to Pull the headlight housing straight out . the side. 2. Press down the clips on the upper edge of CAUTION the cover and remove it. When disconnecting the connector, pull on the connector itself and not on the wiring. Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

3. (Lower illustration under "Headlight housing")

1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

225 06 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

Low beam, Halogen High beam, Halogen 7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.

Extra high beam2 G021746 G021747

1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 224). vehicle (see page 224). G021748 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs. 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 225). 1. Remove the headlight housing from the 3. Detach the bulb by pressing the upper sec- vehicle (see page 224). tion of the retaining spring downward and 3. Pull the bulb holder out of the headlight 06 to the side. housing. 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 225). 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 4. Turn the defective bulb counterclockwise and pull it out of the socket. 3. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder 5. Replace the bulb and reinsert it into the downward. headlight housing. 5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place. It can only be secured in 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 6. Put the cover back into position and rein- one position. stall the headlight housing. 5. Insert a new bulb in the connector until it 6. Return the bulb holder into position in the snaps in place. It can only be inserted in headlight housing. one way.

2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

226 06 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

6. Return the bulb holder into position in the 6. Press the bulb holder into the socket and 6. Press the cover until it clicks into position. headlight housing. press until it clicks into place. 7. Reinstall the headlight housing. 7. Put the cover back into position and rein- 7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing. stall the headlight housing. Side marker lights

Parking lights Turn signals G021751 G021749 G021750 NOTE 1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the Before starting to replace a bulb, see 06 vehicle (see page 224). vehicle (see page 224). page 224. 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 2. Remove the round cover by pulling the tab page 225). until the cover comes off. 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 224). 3. To access the bulb, first remove the high 3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb. beam bulb. 2. Remove the round cover. 4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it 4. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder. in slightly and turning out before pulling it 3. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder. out. Press a new bulb into the socket. 5. Remove the burned out bulb and install a 4. Pull out the burned out bulb and install a new one. It can only be secured in one 5. Press the bulb holder into the socket and new one. It can only be secured in one position. press until it clicks into place. position.

227 06 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

5. Press the bulb holder into the socket and 6. Reinstall the bulb holder. The TOP mark on NOTE press until it clicks into place. the bulb holder must always be upward. If an error message remains in the display 6. Press the cover until it clicks into position. 7. Put the cover back into place. after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. Front fog lights Location of taillight bulbs G015418 G021753 G021755

Taillight lens, right side Taillight bulb holder, right side 1. Remove the cover by pressing in the clips Turn signal 06 and pulling straight out. Parking lights (LED) 2. Unscrew the fog light housing screw and Turn signals Brake lights pull it out. Side maker lights (LED) Rear fog light (driver’s side only) 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and Backup light remove it. Brake lights 4. Install a new bulb by turning clockwise. Rear fog light (driver’s side only) 5. Press the bulb into the holder. (The profile Backup light of the bulb holder corresponds to the profile of the foot of the bulb.)

228 06 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

Taillight housing 5. Press the bulb holder until it clicks into Footwell lighting place and reinstall the cover.

License plate lighting G021754 G021757

The bulbs in the taillight cluster are replaced 1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of the from inside the trunk (not the LED functions). lens closest to the tunnel console (the cen- G021756 ter of the vehicle) and turn gently so that NOTE 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. the lens comes loose. (Applies to both lights). Before starting to replace a bulb, see 2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing page 224. and pull it out. 2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose. 06 3. Replace the bulb. 3. Replace the bulb. 1. Remove the covers in the left/right panel to 4. Press the lens back into place. access the bulbs. The bulbs are located in 4. Refit the entire bulb housing and screw it separate bulb holders. into place. 2. Press the catches together and pull out the bulb holder. 3. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it in slightly and turning it before pulling it out. 4. Plug in the connector.

229 06 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

Trunk lighting Vanity mirror lighting 2. Press the three lower lugs back into position. Removing the mirror glass Specification, bulbs Lighting Output/volt- Bulb function age (W) Active Bend- 55 H7 ing Lights (extra high beam) G021758 Low beam 55 H7

G021759 (halogen) NOTE 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower High beam 65 H9 Before starting to replace a bulb, see edge, in the center, turn and carefully pry (halogen) page 224. up the lug on the edge. Rear fog light 21 P21W 2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge 06 The trunk lighting is located on opposite sides Brake lights 21 P21W of the trunk. on the left and right sides (by the black rubber sections), and pry carefully so that Backup lights 21 P21W 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the glass comes loose in the lower edge. Rear turn sig- 21 PY21W the bulb housing comes loose. 3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire nals 2. Replace the bulb. mirror glass and cover. Front turn sig- 21 H21W 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press 4. Replace the bulb. nals it back into the bulb housing. Reinstalling the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir- Front fog 35 H8 ror glass back into position. lights

230 06 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

Lighting Output/volt- Bulb function age (W) Footwell light- 5 Festoon ing, trunk bulb lighting, SV5.5 license plate lighting

Vanity mirror 1.2 Festoon bulb SV5.5

Front parking 5 W5W lights

Front side 5 W5W marker lights

Glove com- 5 Festoon partment bulb 06 lighting SV8.5

231 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

Wiper blades Service position Replacing the windshield wiper blades

Wiper blades in service position The windshield wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer The wiper blades must be in the service (verti- than the one on the passenger side. cal) position for replacement or washing. To put them in this position: 1. Switch off the ignition (ignition mode 0, see page 82) and keep the remote key in the 06 ignition slot1. 2. Move the right steering wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 second. The wipers will then move to the vertical position on the windshield. The wipers will return to the normal position when the vehicle is started.

1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

232 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

With the wipers in the service position, fold The windshield and headlight washers share a out the wiper arm from the windshield. common reservoir. Press the button on the wiper blade attach- The washer fluid reservoir is located on the ment and pull the wiper blade straight out, driver's side of the engine compartment. Dur- parallel with the wiper arm. ing cold weather, the reservoir should be filled Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks with windshield washer solvent containing into place. antifreeze. For capacities, see page 279. Check that the blade is securely in place.

Cleaning Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent.

Filling washer fluid

06 G021764

Location of the washer fluid reservoir

233 06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

Warning symbols on the battery NOTE WARNING Wear protective goggles. A used battery should be disposed of in an • Never expose the battery to open flame environmentally responsible manner. Con- or electric spark. sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to a recycling station. • Do not smoke near the battery. • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do Keep away from children. not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, Handling skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- • Check that the battery cables are correctly tact occurs, flush the affected area connected and tightened. immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected. Avoid smoking, open flames, • Never disconnect the battery when the and/or sparks. engine is running (for example, when replacing the battery). NOTE • If the battery is fully discharged a number The life of the battery is shortened if it of times, this may shorten its service life. becomes discharged repeatedly. See the owner's manual. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further Maintenance decrease the battery’s starting capacity. Use a screw driver to open the caps or 06 • Contains corrosive acid. • Because the battery’s starting capacity cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. decreases with time, it may be necessary • If necessary, add distilled water. The level to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for should never be above the indicator. an extended period of time or if the vehicle • The fluid level should be checked if the is usually only driven short distances. battery has been recharged. Risk of explosion Never use a quick charger to charge the bat- • After inspection, be sure the cap over each tery. battery cell or the cover is securely in place. • Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and properly tightened.

234 06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

• Never disconnect the battery when the Changing engine is running, or when the key is in the ignition. This could damage the vehicle's electrical system. • The battery should be disconnected from the vehicle when a battery charger is used directly on the battery. • To help keep the battery in good condition, the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 minutes a week or connected to a charger with an automatic charging function. • If the battery is fully discharged a number of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps prolong its service life. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. 06 • Because the battery’s starting capacity WARNING decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for Connect and disconnect the positive and an extended period of time or if the vehicle negative cables in the correct sequence. is usually only driven short distances. • Removal Switch off the ignition and wait at least CAUTION 5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so • Always use distilled or deionized water (battery water). • Never fill above the level mark in the cell.

235 06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

that all information in the vehicle's electrical system can be stored in the control modules. Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free. Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable. 2. Move the battery inward and to the side Detach the red positive cable until it reaches the rear edge of the box. Detach the ventilation hose from the 3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the clamp. battery 4. Connect the ventilation hose. Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp. 5. Connect the red positive cable. Move the battery to the side and lift it up. 6. Connect the black negative cable. 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). 06 WARNING 8. Reinstall the cold section moulding. (See PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Removal). Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with sories contain lead and lead compounds, the clips. (See Removal). chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Installation 1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

236 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Replacing fuses Location of the fuse boxes There are relay/fuse boxes located in the engine compartment, the passenger compartment, and the trunk. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, special fuse removal tools are located on the inside of the fuse box covers. 2. From the side, examine the curved metal Under the glove compartment wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. Under the glove compartment If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the Center console (S80 Executive* only) same color and amperage (written on the fuse). If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical Trunk 06 system inspected by a trained and qualified Engine compartment Volvo service technician.

WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Engine compartment

238 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Engine compartment, upper Function A Function A Engine compartment, front Circuit breaker 60 Engine Control Module (ECM), 10 Engine compartment, lower transmission, SRS – Heated washer nozzles* 10 Positions – These fuses are all located in the engine com- Vacuum pump I5T 5 partment box. Fuses in are located under Headlight washers* 20 . Lighting panel 5 Windshield wipers 30 NOTE - – • Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be - changed at any time when necessary. Climate system blower 40 • Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/ - circuit breakers and should only be – removed or replaced by a trained and Relay - engine compartment 5 qualified Volvo service technician. ABS pump 40 box

• There is a special fuse removal tool on ABS valves 20 Auxiliary lights* 20 the underside of the cover. 06 – Horn 15 Function A Active Bending Lights-head- 10 Engine Control Module (ECM) 10 light leveling* Circuit breaker 50 Control module - automatic 15 transmission Circuit breaker 50 Central electrical module 20 A/C compressor 15 Circuit breaker 60 ABS 15 feed 5 Relay-coils 5 Circuit breaker 60 Speed-dependent steering 5 force*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Function A Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

Engine Control Module (ECM), 10 throttle

Injection system, Mass air 15 meter (ECM)

Engine valves 10

EVAP/heated oxygen sensor/ 15 fuel injection

Water pump (V8) 10

Fuel leakage detection 5

06 –

Cooling fan 80

240 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse Po Function A Po Function A boxes. s s 1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. 06 - Controls in front passenger's 25 2. The fuses are accessible. door - Positions-fuse box A Controls in right rear passeng- 25 Po Function A – er's door s - Controls in left rear passeng- 25 Circuit breaker - audio system, 40 er's door subwoofer* 12-volt socket (trunk) 15 Keyless drive* 20 - Controls in driver's door 25 Power driver's seat* 20

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Po Function A Po Function A Pos Function A s s Adaptive cruise control/ 10 Power front passenger's seat* 20 Sun curtain*, S80 Executive 10 collision warning* only: Front seat massage and Folding rear seat head 15 armrest lighting, refrigerator* Courtesy lighting, Rain 7.5 restraints sensor* Heated rear passenger's seat 15 - (right) Steering wheel module 7.5

– Heated rear passenger's seat 15 Rear cental locking and 10 (left) fuel filler door Audio system, Navigation sys- 10 tem display* Park assist*, Volvo Navigation 5 - System*, Park assist camera* Audio system 15 Windshield washer 15 All Wheel Drive control mod- 5 Bluetooth hands-free system 5 ule* Trunk unlock 10

- Active chassis system* 5 Trunk lock 10

Power moonroof* 5 06 Positions-fuse box B Fuel pump 20 Courtesy lighting, climate sys- Pos Function A tem sensor Remote key receiver, 5 Alarm, Heart beat sensor*, - 15 12-volt sockets, Rear Seat 15 Climate system Entertainment system* - Steering wheel lock 15 Heated front passenger's 15 Front courtesy lighting, 7.5 seat* Alarm, On-board diagnos- power seat(s)* tic system Heated driver's seat* 15 Instrument panel informa- 5 - tion display

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Function A Airbag system, Occupant 10 weight system

Adaptive cruise control 5 front radar*

Accelerator pedal, power 7.5 door mirrors, Heated rear seats*

Brake lights 5

Power moonroof* 20

Immobilizer 5

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

In the center consol – S80 Executive only

NOTE If the fuse listed below needs to be 06 replaced, please consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Pos Function A Analogue clock 5

244 06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions Rear fuse box A Rear fuse box A Rear fuse box A 06 - Trailer socket 1* 40 Electric parking brake (left 30 side) - - - -

Electric parking brake (right 30 - - side) - - Heated rear window 30 - - Trailer socket 2* 15

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

Introduction of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires Tire age Your vehicle is equipped with tires according without the "all-season" rating. However, for Tires degrade over time, even when they are to the vehicle's tire information placard on the optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered not being used. It is recommended that tires B-pillar (the structural member at the side of roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on generally be replaced after 6 years of normal the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door all four wheels. service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent opening), or on the inside of the fuel filler door When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V) on Canadian models. are the same size designation, type (radial) and exposure can accelerate the aging process. preferably from the same manufacturer, on all You should replace the spare tire when you CAUTION four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering replace the other road tires due to the aging of Some Volvo models are equipped with an the car's roadholding and handling characte- the spare. ristics. Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com- A tire's age can be determined by the DOT bination designed to provide maximum dry stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). pavement performance with consideration New Tires for hydroplaning resistance. As such, they A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration may be more susceptible to road hazard should be replaced immediately. damage and, depending on driving conditions, may achieve a tread life of less than Improving tire economy 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehi- • Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tire cle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWD pressure tables, see pages 251 and 251. or DSTC system, these tires are not 06 designed for winter driving, and should be • Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard replaced with winter tires when weather braking and tire screeching. conditions dictate. • Tire wear increases with speed. • Correct front wheel alignment is very

The tires have good road holding characteris- G021823 important. tics and offer good handling on dry and wet Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy Remember that tires are perishable goods. As • surfaces. It should be noted however that the and driving comfort. tires have been developed to give these fea- of 2000, the manufacturing week and year tures on snow/ice-free surfaces. (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) • Tires must maintain the same direction of will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g. 1502 means rotation throughout their lifetime. Certain models are equipped with "all-season" that the tire illustrated was manufactured dur- • When replacing tires, the tires with the tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree ing week 15 of 2002). most tread should be mounted on the rear

246 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer • The tires with the most tread should always WARNING during hard braking. be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid- The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the ding). • • are specified to meet stringent stability tires and/or wheels permanently. Contact a Volvo workshop if you are • and handling requirements. Unap- unsure about the tread depth. Summer and winter tires proved wheel/tire size combinations Storing wheels and tires can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- When storing complete wheels (tires mounted bility and handling. Approved tire sizes on rims), they should be suspended off the are shown in the tire inflation pressure floor or placed on their sides on the floor. tables on pages 251 and 251. • Any damage caused by installation of Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on unapproved wheel/tire size combina- their sides or standing upright, but should not tions will not be covered by your new be suspended. vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or CAUTION expenses that may result from such installations. Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, G021778 dry, dark place, and should never be stored in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the Tire wear tire etc. 06 • When switching between summer and Tire rotation winter tires, mark the tires to indicate Tire wear is affected by a number of factors where they were mounted on the car, e.g., such as tire inflation, ambient temperature, LF = left front, RR = right rear driving style, etc. Your vehicle is driven mainly • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one by the front tires, which will wear faster. direction are marked with an arrow on the If the tires are rotated, they should only be sidewall. moved from front to back or vice versa. They • Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's should never be rotated left to right/right to left. braking properties and ability to force However, tire rotation, done at the recom- aside rain, snow and slush. mended intervals, is one way of helping to keep

247 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

tread wear as even as possible and will help Tread wear indicator Tire inflation you get maximum mileage from your tires. Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 miles (5, 000 km) and thereafter at 6,000 mile (10,000 km) intervals. Tire rotation should only be performed if front/ rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

NOTE G021829 G032521 Tire rotation is not included in regularly scheduled maintenance and is performed The tires have wear indicator strips running Tire inflation placard on U.S. models only at customer request, at additional charge. across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI Tire inflation are printed on the side of the tire. When Check tire inflation pressure regularly. approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance tread, these strips become visible and indicate Tables listing the recommended inflation pres- based on your particular driving circumstan- that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less sure for your vehicle can be found on pages 06 ces. than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac- 251 and 251. A tire inflation pressure placard tion. is also located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at When replacing worn tires, it is recommended the rear of the driver's door opening). This plac- that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size ard indicates the designation of the factory- as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera- limits and inflation pressure. tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

248 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

NOTE WARNING the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label. • The placards shown indicate inflation • Under-inflation is the most common pressure for the tires installed on the cause of tire failure and may result in Checking tire pressure vehicle at the factory only. severe tire cracking, tread separation, Cold tires or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of • A certain amount of air seepage from Inflation pressure should be checked when the vehicle control and increased risk of the tires occurs naturally and tire pres- tires are cold. sure fluctuates with seasonal changes injury. in temperature. Always check tire pres- • Under-inflated tires reduce the load car- The tires are considered to be cold when sure regularly. rying capacity of your vehicle. they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. • Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation This temperature is normally reached after the pressure, including the spare, at least once vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. a month and before long trips. You are After driving a distance of approximately strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pres- 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be sure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. hot. If you have to drive farther than this distance to pump your tire(s), check and record • Use the recommended cold inflation pres- the tire pressure first and add the appropriate sure for optimum tire performance and air pressure when you get to the pump. wear. 06 If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, • Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires G032522 are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold NOTE Tire inflation placard on Canadian models pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended A certain amount of air seepage from the When weather temperature changes occur, tire cold inflation pressure could be significantly tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluc- inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree under-inflated. tuates with seasonal changes in tempera- temperature drop causes a corresponding ture. Always check tire pressure regularly. drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure, which can be found on

249 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

To check inflation pressure: Tire specifications Load ratings 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the Speed ratings 99 1709 lbs (755 kg) valve. The speed ratings in the table translate as follow: 102 1874 lbs (850 kg) 2. Add air to reach the recommended air pressure. 104 1984 lbs (900 kg) Speed ratings 3. Replace the valve cap. 107 2150 lbs (975 kg) M 81 mph (130 km/h) 4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare. Q 100 mph (160 km/h) See also page 252 for an explanation of the designations on the sidewall of the tire. 5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there T 118 mph (190 km/h) are no nails or other objects embedded that could puncture the tire and cause an H 130 mph (210 km/h) air leak. V 149 mph (240 km/h) 6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular- W 168 mph (270 km/h) ities. Y 186 mph (300 km/h) 06 NOTE Load ratings • If you overfill the tire, release air by The speed ratings in the table translate as fol- pushing on the metal stem in the center low: of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge. Load ratings • Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other tires. Consult 91 1365 lbs (615 kg) the tire inflation tables or see the inflation pressure placard. 93 1433 lbs (650 kg)

250 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure table – U.S. models The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory. Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons Front Rear psi/kPa psi/kPa

6-cylinder models 35/240 35/240 225/50 R17 245/40 R18

V8 models 36/250 36/250 245/40 R18

T 125/80 R17 61/420 61/420

Tire inflation pressure table – Canadian models 06 The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory. Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons Optional tire pressure for up to 3 persons Front Rear Front Rear psi/kPa psi/kPa psi/kPa psi/kPa

6-cylinder models 38/260 38/260 33/230 33/230 225/50 R17 245/40 R18

251 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons Optional tire pressure for up to 3 persons V8 models 38/260 38/260 35/240 35/240 245/40 R18

T 125/80 R17 61/420 61/420 61/420 61/420

Tire designations NOTE 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum speed at which the tire is designed to be 5 6 7 9 8 Please be aware that the following tire des- driven for extended periods of time, carry- ignation is an example only and that this ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and particular tire may not be available on your vehicle. with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph 4 (210 km/h). 10 1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) 3 from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The NOTE 2 larger the number, the wider the tire. This information may not appear on the tire 11 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width. 1 because it is not required by law. 12 3. R: Radial tire.

06 G010753 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers inches). place standardized information on the sidewall 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a of all tires (see the illustration). load index of 95 equals a maximum load of The following information is listed on the tire 1521 lbs (690 kg). sidewall: The tire designation:

252 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

7. M+S or M/ 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain, grades: See page 255 for more informa- tires designed to carry a heavier maximum AS = All Season tion. load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number 12. Maximum permissible inflation pressure: beyond this pressure will not increase the (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" the greatest amount of air pressure that tire's load carrying capability. and indicates that the tire meets all federal should ever be put in the tire. This limit is standards. The next two numbers or letters set by the tire manufacturer. • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- are the plant code where it was manufac- sure. tured, the next two are the tire size code Glossary of tire terminology • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard and the last four numbers represent the unit of air pressure. week and year the tire was built. For exam- The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, • B-pillar: The structural member at the side ple, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. of the vehicle behind the front door. The numbers in between are marketing radial tubeless, etc. • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next codes used at the manufacturer's discre- • Tire information placard: A placard to the rim. tion. This information helps a tire manufac- showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire turer identify a tire for safety recall purpo- sizes, recommended inflation pressure, • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the ses. and the maximum weight the vehicle can bead area and the tread. carry. Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim- 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material • eter of the tire that contacts the road when Used: Indicates the number of plies indi- • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num- mounted on the vehicle. cates or the number of layers of rubber- ber on the sidewall of each tire providing 06 coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. information about the tire brand and man- • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man- a tire and tube assembly upon which the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, ufacturer. tire beads are seated. which include steel, nylon, polyester, and • Inflation pressure: A measure of the • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating others. amount of air in a tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This 10. Maximum • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met- rating is established by the tire manufac- Load: Indicates the maximum load in ric tires designed to carry a maximum load turer. pounds and kilograms that can be carried at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire infor- Increasing the inflation pressure beyond • Maximum permissible inflation mation placard located on the B-Pillar for this pressure will not increase the tires load pressure: the greatest amount of air pres- the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. carrying capability.

253 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

sure that should ever be put in the tire. This Curb weight NOTE limit is set by the tire manufacturer. The weight of the vehicle including a full tank The location of the various labels in your Recommended tire inflation pressure: of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not • • vehicle can be found on page 272. inflation pressure, established by Volvo, include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- which is based on the type of tires that are ment. • A table listing important weight limits for mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This your vehicle can be found on page inflation pressure is affected by the number Capacity weight 275. of occupants in the vehicle, the amount of All weight added to the curb weight, including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, cargo, and the speed at which the vehicle Steps for Determining Correct Load will be driven for a prolonged period. This trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo Limit information can be found on the tire infla- weight. tion placard(s) located on the driver's side 1. Locate the statement "the combined weight of occupants and cargo should B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this NOTE chapter. never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi- For trailer towing information, please refer to cle's placard. • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be the section "Towing a trailer", see cold when they have the same temperature page 209. 2. Determine the combined weight of the as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem- driver and passengers that will be riding in perature is normally reached after the vehi- your vehicle. cle has been parked for at least 3 hours. Permissible axle weight The maximum allowable weight that can be 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver 06 carried by a single axle (front or rear). These and passengers from XXX kilograms or Vehicle loading numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian XXX pounds. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi- Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ 4. The resulting figure equals the available mum return of vehicle design performance. CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must amount of cargo and luggage load Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself never exceed its maximum permissible weight. capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount with the following terms for determining your equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five Gross vehicle weight (GVW) vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian amount of available cargo and luggage gers. Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) tion placard:

254 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage Uniform Tire Quality Grading faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST may have poor traction performance. The trac- That weight may not safely exceed the CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY tion grade assigned to this tire is based on available cargo and luggage load capacity REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is calculated in Step 4. GRADES not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load Quality grades can be found, where appli- WARNING from your trailer will be transferred to your cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine shoulder and maximum section width. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is how this reduces the available cargo and example: based on braking (straight-ahead) traction luggage load capacity of your vehicle. tests and is not a measure of cornering Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A (turning) traction. WARNING TREADWEAR TEMPERATURE • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grades are AA (the highest), gross vehicle weight, or any other based on the wear rate of the tire when tested weight rating limits can cause tire over- under controlled conditions on a specified gov- A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance heating resulting in permanent defor- ernment test course. For example, a tire gra- to the generation of heat and its ability to dis- mation or catastrophic failure. ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) sipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test Do not use replacement tires with lower times as well on the government course as a • wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause load carrying capacities than the tires tire graded 100. The relative performance of the material of the tire to degenerate and 06 that were original equipment on the tires depends upon the actual conditions of reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can vehicle because this will lower the vehi- their use, however, and many depart signifi- cle's GVW rating. Replacement tires cantly from the norm due to variation in driving lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- with a higher limit than the originals do habits, maintenance practices and differences sponds to a minimum level of performance that not increase the vehicle's GVW rating in road characteristics and climate. all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the limitations. Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. TRACTION Grades B and A represent higher levels of per- The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are formance on the laboratory test wheel than the AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled minimum required by law. conditions on specified government test sur-

1 See "Introduction" on page 209.

255 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

WARNING Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow advised to fit suitable winter tires to help chain information. retain the highest degree of traction. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and • It is important to install winter tires on all not overloaded. Excessive speed, under- CAUTION four wheels to help retain traction during cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail- inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- Check local regulations regarding the • ure to do so could reduce traction to an rately or in combination, can cause heat use of snow chains before installing. buildup and tire failure. unsafe level or adversely affect handling. Use single-sided snow chains only. • • Do not mix tires of different design as this • Always follow the chain manufacturer's could also negatively affect overall tire road Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires installation instructions carefully. Install grip. chains as tightly as possible and Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads Snow chains retighten periodically. • Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with in warm weather. They should be removed Never exceed the chain manufacturer's the following restrictions: • when the winter driving season has ended. specified maximum speed limit. (Under Studded tires should be run-in Snow chains should be installed on front no circumstances should you exceed • • 300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during wheels only. Use only Volvo approved 31 mph (50 km/h). which the vehicle should be driven as snow chains. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns smoothly as possible to give the studs the • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires when driving with snow chains. opportunity to seat properly in the tires. and wheels are installed and are of a size • The handling of the vehicle can be The tires should have the same rotational 06 different than the original tires and wheels, adversely affected when driving with direction throughout their entire lifetime. chains in some cases CANNOT be used. chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well Sufficient clearances between chains and as locked wheel braking. NOTE brakes, suspension and body components must be maintained. Please consult state or provincial regula- Snow tires, studded tires2 tions restricting the use of studded winter • Some strap-on type chains will interfere tires before installing such tires. with brake components and therefore Tires for winter use: CANNOT be used. • Owners who live in or regularly commute • All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains through areas with sustained periods of should only be installed on the front snow or icy driving conditions are strongly wheels.

2 Where permitted

256 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

Temporary Spare Changing a wheel WARNING 3 The spare tire in your vehicle is called a "Tem- Current legislation prohibits the use of the porary Spare". “Temporary Spare” tire other than as a tem- Recommended tire pressure (see the placard porary replacement for a punctured tire. It on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling be maintained irrespective of which position on may be affected with the “Temporary the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on. Spare” in use. In the event of damage to this tire, a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer. CAUTION WARNING The vehicle must never be driven with more G014341 than one temporary spare wheel. Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem- Location of jack and tools porary replacement for a punctured tire. It The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel must be replaced as soon as possible by a Spare wheel well with the rim side down. There are two foam standard tire. Road holding and handling The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only blocks, one under the spare wheel and one may be affected with the "Temporary intended for temporary use. Replace the spare over/inside. The upper one contains all tools. Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible. (80 km/h). The car's handling may be altered by the use The same bolt runs through to secure the spare 06 of the spare wheel. The correct tire pressure for wheel and the foam blocks. the spare wheel is stated in the tire pressure Taking out the spare wheel CAUTION tables on pages 251 and 251. 1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward. The vehicle must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire 2. Open the floor hatch. other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can 3. Undo the retaining bolt. seriously damage your car's transmission. 4. Lift out the foam block with tools. 5. Lift out the spare wheel.

3 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

257 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

The other two blocks can remain in the wheel use the lug wrench to loosen the wheel 8. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and well. nuts 1/2 – 1 turns by exerting downward carefully remove the wheel so as not to pressure. damage the threads on the studs. After use The foam block and spare wheel must be 5. Turn the nuts counterclockwise to loosen. replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow WARNING on the upper foam block. It should point for- • The jack must correctly engage the jack ward. attachment. • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- slippery surface. • Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. • Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other job,

G017465 use stands to support the vehicle. • Apply the parking brake and put the 6. There are two jack attachment points on gear selector in the Park (P) position. each side of the vehicle. Position the jack • Block the wheels standing on the 06 correctly in the attachment (see illustration ground, use rigid wooden blocks or Removing the wheel cover above) and crank while simultaneously large stones. Changing a tire: guiding the base of the jack to the ground. • The jack should be kept well-greased 1. Apply the parking brake. The base of the jack must be flat on a level, and clean, and should not be damaged. firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising 2. Put the gear selector in P. the vehicle, check that the jack is still cor- • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or rectly positioned in the attachment. 3. Block the wheels that are on the ground between the jack and the attachment with wooden blocks or large stones. 7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be bar on the vehicle. 4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica- changed is lifted off the ground. ble) using the lug wrench in the tool bag.With the vehicle still on the ground,

258 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

Re-installing the wheel Tire Sealing System* Accessing the tire sealing system 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel The tire sealing system is stowed under the and hub. floor of the trunk. To access it: 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. 1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. 2. Remove the screw holding the tire sealing system's retaining bracket. 3. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE • The tire sealing system is only intended

G014340 to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not the sidewall. Introduction • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be repaired with the tire sealing system. Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing G022916 system that enables you to temporarily seal a • After use, stow the tire sealing system Tighten the lug nuts hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, properly to help prevent rattling. 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand- or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross- The system consists of an air compressor, a 06 wise until all nuts are snug. container for the sealing compound, wiring to 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical nately tighten the bolts crosswise to system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve. 5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable). The 12-volt sockets are located in the front tunnel console and on the rear side of the center console in the rear seat, see page 193.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

WARNING Tire sealing system–overview WARNING • After using the tire sealing system, the Please keep the following points in mind vehicle should not be driven farther than when using the tire sealing system: approximately 120 miles (200 km). • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in • Have the tire inspected by a trained and the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol qualified Volvo service technician as and natural rubber-latex. These sub- soon as possible to determine if it can stances are harmful if swallowed. be permanently repaired or must be • The contents of this bottle may cause replaced. allergic skin reactions or otherwise be • The vehicle should not be driven faster potentially harmful to the skin, the cen- than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire tral nervous system, and the eyes. that has been temporarily repaired with Precautions: the tire sealing system. Speed limit sticker • Keep out of reach of children. • After using the tire sealing system, drive Do not ingest the contents. carefully and avoid abrupt steering On/Off switch • maneuvers and sudden stops. • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact Electrical wire with the skin. Bottle holder (orange cover) • Hands should be washed thoroughly 06 after handling. Protective hose cover First aid: Air release knob • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Get medical attention Hose if symptoms occur. Bottle with sealing compound • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the Air pressure gauge

260 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

upper and lower eyelids. Get medical Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it attention if symptoms occur. stages: to the steering wheel hub where it will be clearly visible to the driver. • Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air. • Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping If irritation persists, get medical atten- sealing compound into the tire. The car is 3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position. then driven a short distance to distribute tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be the sealing compound in the tire. pressed down).

Tire sealing system–temporarily NOTE repairing a flat tire WARNING Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, Contact with the sealing compound may etc.) from the tire before using the sealing cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash system. the affected area immediately with soap and water. • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is checked and adjusted if necessary. 4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle WARNING of sealing compound. • Never leave the tire sealing system unattended when it is operating. NOTE • Keep the tire sealing system away from Do not break the seal on the bottle. This 06 children. occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder. • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off the road and away from moving traffic. 5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. • Apply the parking brake.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole 1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit. G014338

261 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

WARNING WARNING CAUTION The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep • Never stand next to the tire being inflated The compressor should not be used for it securely in place and help prevent sealing when the compressor is in operation. more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid compound leakage. Once in place, the bot- overheating. tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, by a trained and qualified Volvo service switch off the compressor immediately. technician. • If there is visible damage to the sidewall WARNING or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. If the pressure remains below 22 psi 6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- The vehicle should not be driven if this (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes, tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys- occurs. Contact a towing service or turn off the compressor. In this case, the Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if tem’s hose connector onto the valve as hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle applicable. tightly as possible by hand. should not be driven. 7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect 12-volt socket in the vehicle. NOTE the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. 8. Start the vehicle’s engine. The air pressure gauge will temporarily show an increase in pressure to approxi- 12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com- valve and reinstall the valve cap. WARNING pound is being pumped into the tire. The pressure should return to a normal level 13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi- The vehicle´s engine should be running mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed 06 when the tire sealing system is used to avoid after approximately 30 seconds. of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal- battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle ing compound in the tire. is parked in a well ventilated place, or out- 10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to doors, before using the system. between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear 9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor reading from the pressure gauge. by pressing the on/off switch to position I.

262 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

CAUTION WARNING Replacing the sealing compound container If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the behavior, or noises should occur while driv- The sealing compound container must be use of the sealing compound may lead to ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a replaced if: incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, • the tire sealing system has been used to cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. cracks, or other visible damage, and repair a tire Use the tire sealing system to check and recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure. is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue • the container’s expiration date has passed driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained (see the date on decal). and qualified Volvo service technician. NOTE NOTE • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure • After use, the sealing compound bottle, convenient place as it will soon be used 1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri- the hose, and certain other system again to check the tire’s inflation pres- bed in stage 1. components must be replaced. Please sure. 2. Refer to the inflation pressure tablesfor the consult your Volvo retailer for replace- The empty bottle of sealing compound ment parts. • correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs cannot be removed from the bottle to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s • If the sealing compound bottle’s expi- holder. Consult a trained and qualified compressor. If necessary, release air from ration date has passed, please take it to Volvo service technician to have the a Volvo retailer or a recycling station bottle removed and properly disposed the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise. that can properly dispose of harmful 06 of. substances. CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.

WARNING If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 hour, check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing.

263 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

Inflating tires 7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire sealing system can be used to inflate gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to (TPMS)–U.S models only the tires. To do so: get a clear reading from the pressure gauge. 1. Park the car in a safe place. NOTE 8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor- USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002 2. The compressor should be switched off. rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs to This device complies with part 15 of the Ensure that the on/off switch is in position be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol- 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be compressor (press the on/off switch to lowing conditions: (1) This device may not pressed down). position I). If necessary, release air from the cause harmful interference, and (2) this tire by turning the air release knob coun- device must accept any interference 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. terclockwise. received, including interference that may 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- cause undesired operation. tion valve and screw the hose connector CAUTION onto the valve as tightly as possible by The compressor should not be used for The tire pressure monitoring system uses sen- hand. more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla- 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest overheating. tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov- 12-volt socket in the vehicle. ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit 9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. inflation pressure data to a receiver located in switch to position 0) when the correct infla- 06 the vehicle. WARNING tion pressure has been reached. When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation • The vehicle’s engine should be running will light up the tire pressure warning light valve and reinstall the valve cap. when the tire sealing system is used to ( ) (also referred to as a telltale) in the avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the instrument panel and will display one of the the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated 12-volt socket. following messages in the text window: LOW place, or outdoors, before using the sys- TIRE PRESS. CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW tem. TIRE PRESSURE. • Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle when the engine is running.

264 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

NOTE er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- NOTE sure, even if under-inflation has not reached If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does warning light will flash for approximately tire pressure telltale. not replace normal tire maintenance. For 1 minute and Tire press. syst Service information on correct tire pressure, please required will be displayed. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a refer to the Tire inflation pressure tables or TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when consult your Volvo retailer. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the system is not operating properly. The should be checked monthly when cold and TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with Erasing warning messages inflated to the inflation pressure recommended the low tire pressure telltale. When the system When a low tire pressure warning message has by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for been displayed, and the tire pressure warning placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your approximately one minute and then remain light has come on: vehicle has tires of a different size than the size continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation inflation pressure of all four tires. pressure label, you should determine the long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) function indicator is illuminated, the system 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure may not be able to detect or signal low tire (consult the tire pressure placard or the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may tables on pages 251 and 251. been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring occur for a variety of reasons, including the 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- installation of replacement or alternate tires or drive the vehicle for several minutes at a sure telltale when one or more of your tires is wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS 06 speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when from functioning properly. Always check the will erase the warning text and the warning the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one light will go out. should stop and check your tires as soon as or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- ensure that the replacement or alternate tires sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to WARNING tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to function properly. Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel failure, resulting in a loss of control of the efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle. vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-

265 06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tires

Changing wheels with TPMS NOTE Please note the following when changing or replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ • If you change to tires with a different tires on the vehicle: recommended inflation pressure, the TPMS system must be recalibrated to • Only the factory-mounted wheels are these tires. This must be done by a equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves. trained and qualified Volvo service tech- • If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary nician. spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS • If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen- sensor. sor is moved to another wheel, the sen- • If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun- sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST replaced. SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed • When installing TPMS sensors, the each time the vehicle is driven above vehicle must be parked for at least 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more. 15 minutes with the ignition off. if the • Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a the warning message should not reappear. TPMS error message will be displayed. If the message is still displayed, drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the CAUTION 06 message. When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle. valve to help avoid bending or otherwise damaging the valve. Volvo does not recommend moving sensors back and forth between sets of wheels.

266 06 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

Washing the car • Tar spots can be removed with tar remover CAUTION after the car has been washed. During high pressure washing, the WARNING A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy • • spray mouthpiece must never be closer water can be used to clean the wiper Be sure that the compressor is not con- to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind- nected to a 12-volt socket while replacing spray into the locks. the container. shield and wiper blades improves visibility considerably and also helps prolong the • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can service life of the wiper blades. reduce lighting capacity considerably. The following points should be kept in mind Clean the headlights regularly, for Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel when washing and cleaning the car: • example when refueling. housings, fenders, etc). Special moonroof cautions: • The car should be washed at regular inter- • In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre- vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots quent washing is recommended. • Always close the moonroof and sun adhere to the paint and may cause dam- shade before washing your vehicle. age. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently NOTE • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the moonroof. in the wintertime. When washing the car, remember to remove • Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. dirt from the drain holes in the doors and • Never use wax on the rubber seals Doing so may cause detergents and wax sills. around the moonroof. to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid scratching, use lukewarm water to soften CAUTION Exterior components 06 the dirt before you wash with a soft Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub- products, available at your Volvo retailer, for ber components • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish • Polishing chromed strips can wear components such as chromed strips on the may be permanently damaged. away or damage the surface exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for • A detergent can be used to facilitate the • Polishes containing abrasive sub- using these products should be followed care- softening of dirt and oil. stances should not be used fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be used. • Dry the car with a clean chamois and remember to clean the drain holes in the doors and rocker panels.

267 06 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

CAUTION CAUTION mal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi- • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub- • Before driving into an automatic car pate after the lights have been on for a short ber components wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to time. • Polishing chromed strips can wear avoid damaging the windshield wipers. away or damage the surface Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil- • Polishing and waxing iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any • Polishes containing abrasive sub- • Normally, polishing is not required during stances should not be used antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Otherwise there is risk of the machine the first year after delivery, however, wax- dislodging them. ing may be beneficial. Automatic car wash • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle • We do NOT recommend washing your car plated wheels using the same deter- must be washed and dried. Tar spots can in an automatic wash during the first six gents used for the body of the vehicle. be removed with kerosene or tar remover. months (because the paint will not have Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing hardened sufficiently). permanently stain chrome-plated compound. • An automatic wash is a simple and quick wheels. • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. way to clean your car, but it is worth Several commercially available products remembering that it may not be as thor- • contain both polish and wax. ough as when you yourself go over the car WARNING • Waxing alone does not substitute for pol- with sponge and water. Keeping the under- • When the vehicle is driven immediately 06 ishing a dull surface. body clean is most important, especially in after being washed, apply the brakes, the winter. Some automatic washers do including the parking brake, several • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can not have facilities for washing the under- times in order to remove any moisture be purchased today. These waxes are easy body. from the brake linings. to use and produce a long-lasting, high- gloss finish that protects the bodywork • Engine cleaning agents should not be against oxidation, road dirt and fading. used when the engine is warm. This constitutes a fire risk. • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C). Exterior lighting Condensation may form temporarily on the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-

268 06 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

CAUTION sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and towel, and allow the leather to dry com- Volvo does not recommend the use of long- fading can result. pletely. life or durable paint protection coatings, some of which may claim to prevent pitting, Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy Protecting leather upholstery fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on not been tested by Volvo for compatibility tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner to the upholstery with light circular move- may cause the clear coat to soften, crack, removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream ments. or cloud. Damage caused by application of paint protection coatings may not be cov- protectant restores a barrier against soil and 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. ered under your vehicle's paint warranty. sunlight. This will help the leather resist staining and Volvo also offers a special leather softener that protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. should be applied after the cleaner and pro- Cleaning the interior tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- reduces friction between leather and other fin- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly ishes in the vehicle. and follow the instructions included with the car care product. Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four Upholstery care times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- Fabric 06 ener 943 7429. Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, Cleaning leather upholstery shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. AlcanteraTM suede-like material 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a sponge with circular movements. soft cloth and mild soap solution. 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the Leather care sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured do not rub. with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,

269 06 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

CAUTION gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec- Paint repairs require special equipment and ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any exten- • Under no circumstances should gaso- Consult your Volvo retailer. sive damage. line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents be used on the plastic or the leather Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood Minor scratches can be repaired by using since these can cause damage. surfaces Volvo touch-up paint. • Take extra care when removing stains Cleaning interior plastic components should Color code such as ink or lipstick since the coloring be done with a cleaning agent specially Make sure you have the right color. The color can spread. designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo code number is stated on the model plate. • Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol- retailer. vent can damage the seat padding. Minor stone chips and scratches • Start from the outside of the stain and Touching up paintwork Material: work toward the center. • Primer – can • Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a • Paint – touch-up pen pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing Brush may damage the textile upholstery. • • Masking tape • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as new jeans or suede garments, may stain If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare the upholstery. metal and an undamaged color coat remains, 06 you can add paint immediately after removing dirt. Cleaning the seat belts Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap solution. NOTE

1 When touching up the vehicle, it should be Cleaning floor mats Paint code on the model plate clean and dry. The surface temperature The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed Paint damage requires immediate attention to should be above 60 °F (15 °C). clean regularly, especially during winter when avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish they should be taken out for drying. Spots on regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. textile mats can be removed with a mild deter- Touch-up if necessary.

1 see page 272 for the location of the model plate.

270 06 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

Minor scratches on the surface 4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want If the stone chip has not penetrated down to to protect surrounding paint by masking it the metal and an undamaged layer of paint off remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up soon as the spot has been cleaned. areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish. Repairing stone chips G021832 06 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each application.

271 06 Maintenance and specifications

Label information

Location of labels

272 06 Maintenance and specifications

Label information

List of labels Vehicle Emission Control Information. Model Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli- plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). cable emission standards, as evidenced by Codes for color and upholstery, etc. the certification label on the underside of the hood. For further information regarding Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards these regulations, please consult your (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min- Volvo retailer. istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. Loads and Tire Pressures. The appearance of the decal will vary, depending on the market for which the vehicle is intended. See also page 248. 06 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts.

273 06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Dimensions–S80/S80 Executive

Position Dimension in (mm)

06 A Wheelbase 111.6 (2835) B Length 191 (4851)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 75.9 (1927)

D Load length, floor 43.1 (1094)

E Height 58.8 (1493)

F Load height 14.5 (368)

G Track, front 62.5 (1588)

274 06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Position Dimension in (mm) H Track, rear 62.4 (1585)

I Load width, floor 44.5 (1130)

J Width 73.3 (1861)

K Width, incl. door mirrors 82.9 (2106)

Weights Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight 6-cyl. FWDA: 4820 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 2190 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWDB: 5020 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2280 kg 8-cyl. AWD: 5110 lbs 8-cyl. AWD: 2320 kg S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 5020 lbs S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 2280 kg S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 2320 kg S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 5110 lbs 06 Capacity weight 6-cyl. FWD: 905 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 410 kg 6-cyl. Turbo AWD: 890 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 400 kg 8-cyl. AWD: 890 lbs 8-cyl. AWD: 400 kg S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 890 lbs S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 400 kg S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 890 lbs S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 400 kg

275 06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Category USA Canada Permissible axle weights, front 6-cyl. FWD: 2690 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 1220 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2750 lbs 6-cyl. AWD turbo: 1250 kg 8-cyl. AWD: 2860 lbs 8-cyl. AWD: 1300 kg S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 2750 lbs S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 1250 kg S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 2860 lbs S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 1300 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear 6-cyl. FWD: 2270 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 1030 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2360 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 1070 kg 8-cyl. AWD: 2380 lbs 8-cyl. AWD: 1080 kg S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 2360 lbs S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 1070 kg S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 2380 lbs S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 1080 kg

Curb weight 3790–4040 lbs 1655–1845 kg S80 Executive: 3970–4040 lbs S80 Executive: 1810–1850 kg 06 Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

A FWD = Front Wheel Drive B AWD = All Wheel Drive

276 06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Engine specifications Specification/ 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0T V8 Model Engine designation B6324S B6324S2 B6304T2 B8444S

Output (kW/rps) 175/103 168/103 210/93 232/99

Output (hp/rpm) 235/6200 225/6200 281/5600 311/5950

Torque (Nm/rps) 320/53 300/57 400/25 – 80 440/66

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 236/3200 221/3400 295/1500 – 4800 325/3950

No. of cylinders 6 6 6 8

Bore (in/mm) 3.3/84 3.3/84 3.23/82 3.7/94

Stroke (in/mm) 3.78/96 3.78/96 3.67/93.2 3.13/79.5

Displacement 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.) 4.4 liters (269.4 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.3:1 9.3:1 10.4:1 06

Engine oil Depending on your driving habits, premium or This oil is only used at customer request, at Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC synthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ- additional charge. Please consult your Volvo specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1. omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo retailer. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel retailer for recommendations on premium or Oil viscosity economy, engine performance, or engine pro- synthetic oils. Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life tection. Oil additives must not be used. under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide Volvo recommends Castrol. Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is good fuel economy and engine protection. See changed at the normal maintenance services. the viscosity chart.

277 06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

recommended for driving in areas of sustained The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into temperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow- three parts: ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro- • The upper section describes the oil's per- longed driving in mountainous areas. formance level. American Petroleum Institute (API) • The center identifies the oil's viscosity. symbol • The lower section indicates whether the oil has demonstrated energy-conserving properties in a standard test in comparison to a reference oil. G023491

Viscosity chart Extreme engine operation Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40 and complying with oil quality requirements are G022917

Oil volume Engine model Oil volume between MIN and Volume (incl. filter) MAX 3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S/S2 1.27 US qts (1.2 liters) 7.82 US qts (7.4 liters)

3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T2 1.27 US qts (1.2 liters) 7.82 US qts (7.4 liters)

V8 B8444S 1.0 US qts (1.1 liters) 7.4 US qts (7.0 liters)

278 06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Other fluids and lubricants Fluid System Volume Specification

Transmission oilA Automatic (TF-80SC) 5.8 US qts (5.5 liters) Transmission fluid BOT 341

Coolant 3.2 (6-cyl.) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water (50/50 mix), see 3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) packaging. V8 10.7 US qts. (10.2 liters)

Air conditioning All models 1.8 lbs (800 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a), PAG oil

Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4+

Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters) Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with 4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB) water. 06 Fuel tank volume 18.5 US gallons (70 liters)

A Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions. B Models without headlight washers

279 06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Electrical system CAUTION General information If the battery is replaced, replace it with a 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter- battery of the same cold start capacity and nator. Single pole system in which the chassis reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery). and engine block are used as conductors. The negative terminal is connected to the chassis.

Performance, battery Engine 3.2 V8 6-cyl./3.0T

Voltage (V) 12 12

Cold start 520-700 600-8 capacity (A) 00

Reserve capacity 100-135 120-1 (min) 60

06 WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

280 06 Maintenance and specifications

Volvo programs

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- VOLVO) In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi- fied technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must 06 also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These pro- fessional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition.

281 07 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Anti-lock brake system...... 116 B warning light...... 76 12-volt sockets...... 193 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 117 Battery changing...... 235 Approach lighting...... 56, 97 maintenance...... 234, 235 A Audio system remote key, replacing...... 59 audio functions...... 136 specifications...... 280 ABS (anti-lock brake system)...... 117 CD player/changer...... 146 warning symbols...... 234 HD digital radio...... 140 Accessory installation warning...... 12 Black box...... 11 overview...... 135 Active chassis system...... 160 radio functions...... 137 Blind Spot Information System Active yaw control...... 158 Sirius satellite radio...... 143 (BLIS)...... 187, 188, 189 Adaptive brake lights...... 116 sound settings...... 136 Bluetooth cell phone connection...... 149 steering wheel keypad...... 135 Adaptive cruise control...... 169, 171 Booster cushions...... 44 USB/iPod connector...... 138 Airbags Brake lights...... 116 Auto-dim rearview mirror...... 103 disconnecting the front passenger’s Brake system side...... 26, 27 Automatic locking retractor...... 37 checking fluid level...... 222 front...... 22 Automatic transmission emergency brake assistance...... 117 inflatable curtain...... 32 Geartronic...... 113, 114 fluid...... 279 side impact...... 30 general description...... 113, 114 general information...... 116 oil...... 279 warning light...... 78 07 Air conditioning...... 132 shiftlock override...... 114 Air distribution...... 129 Bulbs Axle weight...... 254 footwell lighting...... 229 Air distribution table...... 134 headlights...... 224, 225, 226 Air vents...... 130 introduction...... 224 All Wheel Drive...... 115 license plate lights...... 229 side marker lights...... 227 Anti-freeze...... 200, 222

282 07 Index

specifications...... 230 Child safety locks...... 50 D trunk lighting...... 230 Climate system...... 132 air distribution...... 129, 134 Defroster...... 132 air vents...... 130 Detachable key blade...... 59 C Interior Air Quality System...... 129 Disconnecting the front passenger’s air- introduction...... 128 bag...... 26, 27 Capacity weight...... 254 passenger compartment filter...... 129 Dome lighting...... 95, 96 Catalytic converter...... 205 refrigerant...... 128 Door mirrors...... 102 CD player/changer...... 146 Clock Driver distraction warning...... 12 Cell phone, hands-free connection...... 149 analogue...... 80 Driving economically...... 198 Central locking system, introduction...... 54 Clock, setting...... 80 Driving in cold weather...... 200 Chains...... 256 Cold weather driving...... 200 Driving through water...... 199 Check engine light...... 76 Collision warning system...... 163 Child restraints Compass in rearview mirror...... 157 recalls and registration...... 47 Conserving electrical current...... 199 E Child restraint systems...... 38 Convertible seats...... 42 booster cushions...... 44 Coolant...... 222, 279 ECC...... 131, 132, 133 convertible seats...... 42 Cooling system, general information...... 199 Economical driving...... 198 infant seats...... 40 Electric parking brake...... 118 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 45 Courtesy lighting...... 95, 96 07 top tether anchors...... 46 Crash mode...... 35 Electronic Climate Control...... 130, 132, 133 air distribution table...... 134 Child safety...... 36, 37 Cruise control...... 161, 162 Interior Air Quality System...... 133 booster cushions...... 44 adaptive...... 169 ventilated seats...... 131 child restraint systems...... 38 Curb weight...... 254 convertible seats...... 42 Emergency locking retractor...... 37 Current, conserving...... 199 infant seats...... 40 Emergency starting...... 111

283 07 Index

Emergency towing...... 211, 212 Front airbags...... 22 Geartronic automatic transmission.. 113, 114 Emission inspection readiness...... 217 disconnecting passenger’s side air- Generator warning light...... 78 bag...... 26, 27 Engine Glossary of tire terminology...... 253 Front fog lights...... 77, 94 overheating...... 78 Grocery bag holder...... 207 specifications...... 277 Front park assist...... 184, 186 Gross vehicle weight...... 254 starting...... 109 Front seats...... 84, 86, 89 switching off...... 111 heated...... 131 Engine compartment overview...... 219 lumbar support (S80 Executive only).... 89 H Engine oil massage function (S80 Executive only) 89 checking...... 220 moving passenger's seat (S80 Execu- Hazard warning flashers...... 94 tive only)...... 90 low pressure warning light...... 77, 78 HD digital radio...... 140 specifications...... 277 Fuel filler cap...... 204 Headlights volumes...... 278 Fuel filler door, opening...... 204 Active Bending Lights...... 93 Environment...... 13 Fuel level warning light...... 77 changing bulbs...... 225, 226 Eyelets for anchoring loads...... 206 Fuel requirements...... 202, 203 high/low beams...... 92 high beam flash...... 92 Fuel tank volume...... 279 Headlight washers...... 99 Fuses...... 237, 238, 241, 245 F Heartbeat sensor (alarm system)...... 57, 58 Federal Clean Air Act...... 216 Heated front seats...... 131 07 Fluid specifications...... 279 G Heated oxygen sensors...... 205 Heated rear seats...... 131 Fog lights Gasoline requirements...... 203 front...... 77 High beams...... 92 Gas tank volume...... 279 front/rear...... 94 indicator light...... 77 Gauges...... 75 Four C (active chassis system)...... 160 Hoisting the vehicle...... 217 Geartronic...... 114 Home safe lighting...... 96

284 07 Index

Hood, opening/closing...... 219 ISOFIX anchors...... 45 Load anchoring eyelets...... 206 Horn...... 91 Loading the vehicle...... 206, 254 roof loads...... 208 J Locking the vehicle...... 56 I Jack Locks, child safety...... 50 Ignition modes...... 82 attaching...... 258 Low beams...... 92 location of...... 257 Immobilizer...... 55 Low fuel level warning light...... 77 Jump starting...... 111 Important information...... 8 Low oil pressure warning light...... 78 Indicator lights...... 75, 76, 77, 78 Infant seats...... 40 K M Inflatable Curtain...... 32 Key blade...... 54, 59 Inflation pressure...... 248, 249 Main instrument panel...... 126 Keyless drive Inflation pressure tables...... 251 Maintenance...... 216 general description...... 62 hoisting the vehicle...... 217 Information lights...... 75, 76, 77, 78 starting the vehicle...... 109 performed by the owner...... 217 Information symbol...... 77 Malfunction indicator light...... 76 Inspection readiness...... 217 L Menu system...... 124 Instrument lighting...... 92 overview...... 124 07 Instrument overview...... 74, 75 Labels Messages in the instrument panel...... 126 Instrument panel...... 126 list of...... 273 Mirrors Interior Air Quality System...... 129 location of...... 272 defroster...... 103 Interior lighting...... 95, 96 LATCH anchors...... 45 power door...... 102 rearview, auto-dim function...... 103 iPod connector (audio system)...... 138 Leather care...... 269 Lighting panel...... 92

285 07 Index

retractable...... 102 P PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 111, 236, 280 vanity...... 193 Moonroof...... 104 Paint, touching up...... 270 Motor oil Park assist...... 184, 186 R checking...... 220 Parking brake Radio specifications...... 277 electric, applying/releasing...... 118 Sirius satellite radio...... 143 volumes...... 278 warning light...... 78 Radio functions...... 137 Parking lights...... 93 HD digital radio...... 140 changing bulbs...... 227 Rain sensor...... 98 O Personal Car Communicator, unique functions...... 57 READ button...... 126 Occupant safety...... 16 Polishing...... 268 Rear fog light...... 94 Occupant weight sensor...... 26, 27 Power front seat Rear park assist...... 184, 186 Octane recommendations...... 203 memory function...... 85 Rear seats Odometer, trip...... 80 with keyless drive...... 86 folding...... 87 Oil Power mirrors...... 102 heated...... 131 checking...... 220 defroster...... 103 Rearview mirror specifications...... 277 Power moonroof...... 104 auto-dim function...... 103 volumes...... 278 compass...... 157 Power steering On Call Roadside Assistance...... 281 07 fluid...... 223 Rear window defroster...... 103 Overhead courtesy lighting...... 95, 96 speed-dependent...... 160 Recalls, child restraints...... 47 Overheating, engine...... 78 Power steering fluid...... 279 Refrigerant...... 279 Oxygen sensors, heated...... 205 Power windows...... 100 Refrigerator (S80 Executive only)...... 194 laminated glass...... 101 Refueling...... 202, 203 Pregnancy, using seat belts during...... 20 fuel filler cap...... 204

286 07 Index

fuel filler door...... 204 moving the front passenger's seat...... 90 Snow tires...... 256 fuel tank volume...... 279 refrigerator...... 194 Sound settings, audio system...... 136 Registering child restraints...... 47 Safety, occupant...... 16 Spare tire...... 257 Remote key...... 54 Safety defects, reporting...... 17 Speed-dependent steering...... 160 approach lighting...... 56 Seat belt Spin control...... 158 immobilizer...... 55 reminder...... 19 key blade...... 54, 59 SRS...... 21 Seat belts key memory...... 55 Stability system...... 158 Automatic locking retractor/Emergency locking the vehicle...... 56 indicator light...... 77 locking retractor...... 37 Personal Car Communicator...... 56, 57 buckling...... 18 Starting the engine...... 109 replacing the battery...... 59 maintenance...... 18 with keyless drive...... 109 unlocking the vehicle...... 56 pretensioners...... 18 Starting the vehicle Remote key/PCC reminder...... 18 after a crash (crash mode)...... 35 common functions...... 56 reminder warning light...... 78 Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...... 55 Reporting safety defects...... 17 securing child restraint sys- Steering wheel tems...... 40, 42, 44 Roadside Assistance...... 281 adjusting...... 91 unbuckling...... 18 Roof loads...... 208 horn...... 91 use during pregnancy...... 20 keypad...... 91, 124, 135 using...... 18 Stone chips, touching up...... 270 Seats, front...... 84, 85, 89 S Storage spaces...... 191 07 Side door mirrors...... 102 Studded tires...... 256 S80 Executive Side impact airbags...... 30 analogue clock...... 80 Sunroof (moonroof)...... 104 Side marker lights, changing bulbs...... 227 front seat lumbar support...... 89 Sun shade...... 101 front seat massage function...... 89 Sirius satellite radio...... 143 Supplemental restraint system...... 21 glasses...... 194 Snow chains...... 256 warning light...... 78

287 07 Index

T Touching up paint...... 270 U Towing a trailer...... 209, 210 Temporary spare tire...... 257 trailer hitch...... 210 Uniform Tire Quality Grading...... 255 Three-way catalytic converter...... 205 Towing the vehicle...... 211, 212 Unlocking the vehicle...... 56 Tire designations...... 252 Traction control...... 158 Upholstery care...... 269 Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 264, 265 Trailer towing...... 209, 210 indicator light...... 77 trailer hitch...... 210 V Tires...... 246 Transmission age...... 246 general description...... 113, 114 Vanity mirror...... 193 changing from summer to winter...... 247 oil...... 279 changing bulbs...... 230 glossary of terms...... 253 shiftlock override...... 114 improving economy...... 246 Vehicle Event Data...... 11 Tread wear indicator...... 248 inflation pressure...... 248, 249 Vehicle loading...... 206, 254 inflation pressure tables...... 251 Trip computer...... 155 roof loads...... 208 load ratings...... 250 Trip odometers...... 80 Vehicle maintenance...... 216 rotation...... 247 Trips, long distance...... 199 performed by the owner...... 217 snow...... 256 Trunk Vehicle weights...... 275 spare...... 257 changing bulbs...... 230 specifications...... 250 Ventilated seats...... 131 driving with it open...... 198 speed ratings...... 250 Volvo and the environment...... 13 storing...... 247 Turn signals...... 95 07 Volvo Inflatable Curtain...... 32 studded...... 256 changing bulbs...... 227 tire pressure monitoring system...... 264 indicator lights...... 77 Volvo maintenance...... 216 tread wear indicator...... 248 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 281 uniform tire quality grading...... 255 Volvo programs...... 281 Top tether anchors (child restraint systems)...... 46

288 07 Index

W Windshield washer fluid...... 233, 279 Windshield wipers...... 232 Warning flashers, hazard...... 94 Wiper blades Warning lights...... 75, 76, 77, 78 replacing windshield wipers...... 232 Warning symbol...... 79 Warning system, collision...... 163 Warranties...... 216 Washer fluid...... 233, 279 Washers headlight...... 99 windshield...... 98 Water, driving through...... 199 Waxing...... 268 Weights...... 275 Wheels...... 246 changing...... 257, 258 storing...... 247 Whiplash Protection System...... 33 Windows 07 power...... 100 Windshield IR coating...... 99 rain sensor...... 98 washers...... 99 wipers/washers...... 98

289 07 Index

290